Download Print this page

Lucent Technologies 5ESS-2000 Operations And Maintenance Procedures

Hide thumbs Also See for 5ESS-2000:

Hardware reference manual (250 pages)

page of 1421

/ 1421
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

235-105-210

®

-2000 Switch

5ESS

OUTINE OPE ATIONS AND MAINTENANCE P OCEDU ES

5E11(1) and Later Software eleases

Document: 235-105-210

ssue Date: October 1999

ssue Number: 15.00A

Copyright © 1999

October 1999

Page 1

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the 5ESS-2000 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies 5ESS-2000

Page 1 235-105-210 October 1999 ® -2000 Switch 5ESS OUTINE OPE ATIONS AND MAINTENANCE P OCEDU ES 5E11(1) and Later Software eleases Document: 235-105-210 ssue Date: October 1999 ssue Number: 15.00A Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 2 Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this P was complete and accurate at the time of publication. However, information is subject to change. This P describes certain hardware, software, features, and capabilities of Lucent Technologies products. This P is for information purposes; therefore, caution is advised that this P may differ from any configuration currently installed.
Page 3 1-800-225-4672 (From inside the continental United States) 1-630-224-4672 (From outside the continental United States). The CTAM center is staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Acknowledgment Developed by Lucent Technologies Customer Training and nformation Products. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 4 This manual is primarily intended for telephone company personnel who schedule or perform routine maintenance ® for the ESS -2000 switch. NOTE: Lucent Technologies has discontinued the availability of software releases 5E10 and earlier. nformation specific to these earlier releases have been deleted from this document. 1.2 UPDATE INFO MATION Issue 15 ssue 15 is a reissue supporting 5E11 through 5E14 software releases.
Page 5 235-105-210 October 1999  SECT ON 2 EQU PMENT TEST L ST: This section lists preventive (routine) maintenance schedules for the ® -2000 switch. Preventive maintenance is performed on a specified schedule to ensure continuing peak overall performance of the network. ...
Page 6 Orders may also be called in on 1-888-LUCENT-8 (1-888-582-3688) or faxed in on 1-800-566-9568. 1.8 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE Technical assistance for the 5ESS-2000 switch can be obtained by calling the North American Regional Technical Assistance Center (NARTAC) at 1-800-225-RTAC (1-800-225-7822) . This telephone number is monitored 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Page 7 The Compact Digital Exchange (CDX) and the Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX) are switching systems based on the 5ESS-2000 switch. This document is a standard 5ESS-2000 switch document that is also applicable to the CDX and VCDX switching systems. nformation applicable only to CDX or VCDX may be found in the following manuals: ...
Page 8 235-105-210 October 1999  5960-7618 88781 User's Guide  HP88781A Product Specifications Documents for the StorageTek Model 9914V 9-track SCS tape drive (KS-23909, L10) can be ordered from StorageTek 2270 S. 88th Street Louisville, CO 80028 TEL: (303) 673-7242 and are as follows: ...
Page 9 235-105-210 October 1999 2. EQUIPMENT TEST LIST 2.1 INT ODUCTION CAUTION: Do not run demand phase on a routine basis. Demand phase is to be run only when required. Demand ® phase is not covered in this document. f demand is required, refer to 235-105-220 , -2000 Switch Corrective Maintenance Manual.
Page 10 235-105-210 October 1999 Disk. Equipment OS List - Analyze and Clear (See OP:OOS input 24 Hours message in 235-600-700). Fan Units, Communication Module/Time Multiplexed Switch, - Section 8 6 Months Test Procedure 8.14 Fan Units, Switching Module - Test Section 8 6 Months Procedure 8.13 Fan Units, SLU - Test...
Page 11 235-105-210 October 1999 Notes: Since peak load periods, features, recent change activities, growth, etc., vary widely in different offices, some tests may not have specific test schedules that are best for all offices. n cases of this type, the equipment test list gives references where procedures, recommendations, and/or guidelines can be found for the listed test(s).
Page 12 235-105-210 October 1999 3. SYSTEM CONT OL OPE ATIONS DESC IPTION 3.1 INT ODUCTION ® This section contains descriptive material for system control operations associated with the ESS -2000 switch. Some operations or system control functions can be performed by means of stand-alone input messages. n such cases, only a brief explanation of the function or the way to use the input message will be given.
Page 13 235-105-210 October 1999 For example: if an ODD backup is scheduled and date and time has to be changed until a time past the scheduling, this ODD backup will be bypassed. n such a case, the backup might be rescheduled. t is also possible to check whether scheduled routine exercises have been bypassed.
Page 14 235-105-210 October 1999 inhibited, the INHIBIT indicator will be in reverse video. Also this alarm can be inhibited or allowed by either the input message or the menu command at the appropriate MCC page. The MSGS, TMS, and ONTC fan or fan fuse alarms can be inhibited by the system. When such an alarm is inhibited, this is shown at MCC Page 115 COMMUN CAT ON MODULE SUMMARY.
Page 15 235-105-210 October 1999  Stuck coin failures  Automatic mismatch detection. 3.4.2 AUTOMATIC LINE INSULATION TEST (ALIT) The automatic line insulation test (AL T) scans lines to detect leakage to battery or ground and to report unpressurized or under pressurized line cables. The AL T is scheduled by means of recent change data. The parameters that have to be filled in can be found in 235-118-2XX, View 8.1 OFF CE PARAMETERS.
Page 16 235-105-210 October 1999 Operator: This mode is used for manual testing of analog and digital lines. These tests are executed by MCC pages, sometimes in combination with predefined, SL M related recent change views. The operator mode is normally used to test those lines that failed the routine mode tests. Procedures to clear line troubles detected by SL M routine testing can be found in 235-105-220.
Page 17 235-105-210 October 1999 schedule, use the DUMP:ATP M; input command. 3.4.5.3 ATTS Data Input The technician is required to provide session scheduling information, including the trunk group (TG), the TG member, and the range of members to test during the session. The required input data may be entered through RC/V screen prompts (ATTS test session data view) or by manual MML input commands.
Page 18 3.5.2 AUTOMATIC T UNK TEST SCHEDULE 3.5.2.1 General The ATTS is an integrated 5ESS-2000 switch software-based feature which provides a means of scheduling automatic execution of specific types of operational test calls on out-going trunks and logging the individual test results on the AM disk for retrieval at a later time.
Page 19 235-105-210 October 1999 The ATTS is accessible from normal maintenance terminals such as TLWS. The ATTS supports up to 20 schedules which can run concurrently. The entries in these schedules correspond to scheduled test sessions. Each schedule is operated independently, with the schedule data base accessible to multiple users simultaneously. A single time entry in a single schedule, containing a single trunk group to be tested, is considered a session.
Page 20 235-105-210 October 1999  Retry indicator (indicating whether to do an automatic second attempt on failure). Split trunk group testing is permitted. A trunk group can be tested over two or more sessions, if it is too big to be tested in one session.
Page 21 235-105-210 October 1999 input command. Similarly, maintenance personnel can suspend a scheduled test session for maintenance reasons via the STP:ATTS input command, including running on-demand testing, and restart the scheduled test session when ready again. The schedule resumes at the appropriate time in the schedule, skipping tests that were scheduled for the period of suspension.
Page 22 OP:BKUPSTAT input message. When no backups are scheduled, the system response will be NG. Refer to Section 6 of this document for detailed procedures on ODD backup. For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Compact Digital Exchange (CDX), refer to 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020, Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide.
Page 23 RC/V view 22.15, Performance Monitoring Groups. U-interface DSL line card is supported by the interval report feature. The Lucent Technologies AM U-interface DSL line card is not supported. nterval reports are not output. They are directed to the disks where the last interval report generated is available upon demand.
Page 24 235-105-210 October 1999 The default for the verbose option is inhibited. An SM/SM-2000 which is in the verbose mode will report all PCTF occurrences to the RSB by sending the normal REPT PCTF message. However, an SM/SM-2000 which is not in the verbose mode will only report the first and tenth occurrence of a PCTF type on a line to the RSB.
Page 25 235-105-210 October 1999  The NT1 or first BR TE CU that is connected to the U-card does not match the type of service assigned to the customer at line card provisioning time. An example is if the customer subscribes to AM U-DSL services, but an ANSI NT1 is installed at the customer's premises.
Page 26 235-105-210 October 1999  File Transfer and Backup Table 3-2  File Modification and Retrieval Table 3-3  Maintenance Tools Table 3-4 . The three types of input/output messages are routine, troubleshooting, and permanent. Routine messages are used periodically to determine actual or potential troubles in the system. The troubleshooting messages are used to clear troubles and will not cause permanent changes to the system.
Page 27 235-105-210 October 1999 OP:ST:L STD R Routine Reports the contents of a specific directory or file. REPT:F LESYS Troubleshooting This autonomous report warns that a file system within the central processor is about to run out of space. Notes: The message/response names as presented in this table are not intended to be typed into the system. These names are provided so the user can reference these messages in 235-600-700, Input Message Manual, and 235-600-750, Output Message Manual, for the correct syntax.
Page 28 235-105-210 October 1999 To use this facility, the user needs to specify the following:  The Number of the Destination Disk: This disk must be out-of-service (OOS) or off-line (OFL) and does not have to be a mate of the active (ACT) disk. ...
Page 29 235-105-210 October 1999 are located in the directory /log/log. The pathname for each log file is defined in the particular device form. 3.6.7 SIZE OF LOG FILES To prevent a file system overflow, the files are limited in size. When a log file is first created, the file will be called XXXXX1, where XXXXX stands for the log filename.
Page 30 24 hours. The 24-hour report is generated and issued by the 5ESS-2000 switch once a day at 02:00:00. The report is sent to the MCC, the SCCS, and the SCCS/NAC channel and is saved for the next 24 hours to fulfill requests.
Page 31 235-105-210 October 1999 3.7 NETWO K MANAGEMENT 3.7.1 OVE VIEW The overall performance of the network can be degraded if there are too many call attempts in a telephone network. Network management provides real-time surveillance and control techniques to minimize the network degradation. 3.7.2 T UNK G OUP CONT OLS One of the management capabilities is the automatic or manual trunk group controls.
Page 32 235-190-120, CCS7 Signaling Service Features, for more information about this feature. 3.8 AUTHO ITY MANAGEMENT 3.8.1 OVE VIEW The 5ESS-2000 Switch Command Restriction feature, provides the ability to restrict access to input commands and log input activity via authority checking. This section presents authority checking information in three major subsections: ...
Page 33 235-105-210 October 1999 nterface (EA ) commands. The SCC and MCC terminals support terminal-level authority checking only. Authority ® checking is not supported on UNIX terminals. 3.8.3 AUTHO ITY CHECKING CONCEPTS 3.8.3.1 Command Groups 3.8.3.1.1 General A command group is a set of input messages and command pokes grouped together because they share a common function, operate on a common unit, or have some other common characteristics.
Page 34 235-105-210 October 1999 Three levels of authority checking are available for a device: none, terminal, and user. These authority levels are described in the following sections. When discussing authority levels, one must also discuss the login process. An authority level with login enabled yields different authority checking results than the same authority level with login disabled.
Page 35 235-105-210 October 1999 mode, users provide a login and password to gain access to the system. Users in this mode are restricted to commands in command groups assigned both to their login and to the device. f no restrictions are placed on the device, user restrictions still apply and command logging and reporting can still occur.
Page 36 235-105-210 October 1999 By default, logging and reporting are disabled for all command groups. 3.8.3.5 User Identities User identities, also called logins, are created by the system administrator. Logins defined with the admin command are used when authority checking is disabled ('n'). Logins defined by ADD:PAUTH are used when authority checking is enabled ('t' or 'u').
Page 37 235-105-210 October 1999 The AUTH output message class contains output messages for verifying PAUTH, TAUTH, or PROFL data base contents. The MA NT output message class contains output messages relating to requests for or changes in status of unrestricted access on the MCC and SCC. The PSSWD output message class contains all EPT:CMDLOG and EPT:LOGIN output messages.
Page 38 235-105-210 October 1999 A user may change his or her password at any time, subject to a minimum time constraint between password change requests. The default minimum change time is one week, but the administrator can specify a longer period. A password must be changed after a maximum number of weeks has elapsed since the password last changed.
Page 39 235-105-210 October 1999 Assign command groups to the user identity. Enable login and/or authority checking for the terminal. Notice all terminal and user identities are added to TAUTH and PAUTH and assigned command groups before login and/or authority checking are configured. This ensures that the desired command group assignments are in place before anyone is subject to authority checking on the device.
Page 40 235-105-210 October 1999 The administrator can list all terminal identities defined in the terminal authority data base using the VFY:TAUTH input message: VFY:TAUTH f command logging with open terminal restrictions is desired, there is a way to achieve this without adding a terminal identity and assigning all command groups to it.
Page 41 235-105-210 October 1999 ADD:TCG P:TE M="ttyn",P OFL="smmaint" NOTE: Every person and terminal identity should be assigned the PASS command group. This enables everyone to change their own password. Only the administrator should be assigned the ADM N (administrator-only activities) and AUTH (authority administration) command groups.
Page 42 NOTE: Never modify field 2 (comgr_number) when modifying an authdef form. The comgr_number field is set by Lucent Technologies and should not be changed. By modifying authdef fields 4, 5, 7, and 8, the administrator can configure the desired alarm level and logging status for allowed requests and denied requests for each command group.
Page 43 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT:CMDLOG output messages for denied requests appear on PSSWD output message class devices. Valid values are as follows:  NO - denied requests are not reported (default)  CR - denied requests are reported with a CR T CAL alarm level ...
Page 44 235-105-210 October 1999 This happens when commands are run from a script or run by the system, such as periodic maintenance reports. The user identity may not be present, which means the input request was not associated with a specific user. This happens when the login process is not enabled or when commands are run by the system, such as periodic maintenance reports.
Page 45 235-105-210 October 1999 During a software release retrofit, unrestricted access to the MCC and SCC is automatically provided. A EPT:SECU ITY output message reports that command restrictions are disabled to inform operations personnel of a possible change in the level of security on the MCC and SCC. Unrestricted MCC and SCC access is permitted during the entire retrofit process.
Page 46 235-105-210 October 1999 3.9 OFFICE ECO D FO M The office record form(s) can be used to print a record of all recent changes that have occurred for a particular view on a per-view basis. For example, office record 5109-12 will print out the information on recent change view 1.1 for all telephone numbers (TN).
Page 47 BR ``D'' channel provisioned for X.25 packet switching and is physically wired from a ``T'' or ``U'' integrated services line unit ( SLU) line card to the Lucent Technologies 7500 modular data module (MDM). The MDM performs X.25 to asynchronous protocol conversion. The analog side of the modem pool terminates to an analog line unit or SLU ``Z'' analog line card and is wired to the analog modem.
Page 48: Figure 3-1 Basic Layout Of The Modem Pool
235-105-210 October 1999  235-118-252: Recent Change Reference Software Release E11  235-118-253: Recent Change Reference Software Release E12  235-118-254: Recent Change Reference Software Release E13 The diagnostic program that tests the modem pool members is available on demand using the TST:MP? (test modem pool message) input message.
Page 49 AM ODD relations RT_TRKG and TM_ATTT. All CCS test calls use the voice path assurance (VPA) continuity test. NOTE: The APT is disabled in a 5ESS-2000 switch for AUTOPLEX System 1000. The ability to inhibit the call monitor on a per-trunk-group basis is provided by a field in the static AM ODD relation RT_TRKG.
Page 50 235-105-210 October 1999 inhibiting APT. f APT is inhibited, then the call monitor must be inhibited. The call monitor routinely cycles through the AM ODD relation RT_TRKG and selects trunk groups to use for making the test calls. A test call is attempted every 30 seconds; two are attempted (non-CCS and CCS) if CCS is equipped.
Page 51 235-105-210 October 1999 requires integrated services test facility ( STF) hardware for performing digital loopback test calls. For details on interpreting the output, refer to 235-600-750, Output Message Manual. For troubleshooting details, refer to 235-105-220, Corrective Maintenance Procedures. Copyright © 1999 Page 40...
Page 52 235-105-210 October 1999 4. SYSTEM CONT OL OPE ATIONS P OCEDU ES GENE AL Section 4 contains detailed level procedures for performing the system control functions. Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 53 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.1: P INT OFFICE ECO D FO M(S) OVE VIEW The OP:OF :FO M input message will print a record of all recent changes that have occurred for a particular view on a per-view basis. For example, office record 5100 will print out the information on recent change view 1.1 for all TNs (telephone numbers).
Page 54 235-105-210 October 1999 At ROP, OP:OF :FO M a,b c PF is printed followed by a printout of recent change for a Response: number associated with the key D. esults: Copy of forms requested are printed. To print recent changes for a range of numbers associated with the key D (see Table 4.1-1 ), at MCC or TLWS, type and enter: OP:OF :FO M=a,b=c&&d;...
Page 55 235-105-210 October 1999 56071 none 56073 Directory number or range of numbers 56075 Trunk group number or range of numbers 56081 none 56083 Directory number or range of numbers 56091 none 56095 Directory number or range of numbers 56097 Trunk group number or range of numbers 56101 none 56103...
Page 56 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020, Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. NOTE 3: For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX), refer to 235-120-110, Very Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-120 , Very Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide.
Page 57 235-105-210 October 1999 ST1 - ndicates that the information is for the ST1 data stream. ST2 - ndicates that the information is for the ST2 data stream. b = Office D. c = Office type code. d = Number of days until the tape expires. e = Start time in hours and minutes for AMA tape writing.
Page 58 235-105-210 October 1999 P IM = Write primary data. SEC = Write secondary data. ST1 = Used if AMA data goes to the ST1 data stream. ST2 = Used if AMA data goes to the ST2 data stream. NOTE: For a single-data-stream office, the stream does not have to be specified as either an ST1 or ST2; however, for a dual-stream office, the stream must be specified as either an ST1 or ST2.
Page 59 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, go to Step 7. f NO, seek technical assistance. Record the first and last block numbers and the tape sequence number to ensure that data could be retrieved again (if necessary.) Remove the complete (full) AMA tape. Record the first and last block numbers and the tape sequence number to ensure the data could be retrieved again (if necessary).
Page 60 235-105-210 October 1999 s the next output message OK? NOTE: This message comes out automatically when the session terminates. Response: EPT AMATAPE COMPLETE FO ST EAM a VOL SE NUMBE TAPE D IVE NUMBE c STA T TIME dd:dd:dd STA T BLOCK f g END BLOCK h i ECO DS W ITTEN j TAPE SEQUENCE NUMBE k...
Page 61 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: For a single-data-stream-office, the stream does not have to be specified as either ST1 or ST2; however, for a dual-stream-office, the stream must be specified as either ST1 or ST2. EPT AMA DISK SUMMA Y Response 1: DISK IS CU ENTL 0 PE CENT FULL ALL DATA ON THE OFFLINE SIDE HAS BEEN EAD...
Page 62 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020, Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. Note 3: For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX), refer to 235-120-110, Very Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-120, Very Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide.
Page 63 235-105-210 October 1999 Touch ON LINE switch. At master control center (MCC) video terminal, type and enter: VFY:AMATAPE:MT=a,b; Where: a = 01 or 08 if Tape Drive 0 and 01 or 18 if Tape Drive 1. b = ST1 if AMA data goes to ST1 data stream and ST2 if data goes to the ST2 data stream. Response: IP followed by the EPT AMATAPE VE IFY output message is printed.
Page 64 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.4: EMOVE AMA TAPE P OCEDU E At control panel, if ON LINE LED is on, touch ESET switch. Response: ON LINE LED is off. Touch UNLOAD switch. Response: Tape rewinds onto supply reel. Open dust cover. Depress latch release button and remove reel.
Page 65 235-105-210 October 1999 ® Procedure 4.5: PE FO M MANUFACTU E 'S TESTS ON KEYSTONE III TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW ® The tests performed in this procedure will verify the operation of the KEYSTONE tape drive and ensure that the write head current is optimal.
Page 66 235-105-210 October 1999 While holding down the CE switch, press the TEST switch. Response: The DIAGNOSTICS indicator lights and the display reads 00. Press the STEP switch until 03 appears on the display panel. Press the TEST switch. Display reads 30. Response: Press the STEP switch until the display increments from 30 to 37.
Page 67 235-105-210 October 1999 While holding down the CE switch, press the TEST switch. The DIAGNOSTICS indicator lights and the display reads 00. Response: Press the STEP switch until 06 appears on the display. Press the TEST switch. Display reads 60. Response: Press the STEP switch until the display reads 64.
Page 68 235-105-210 October 1999 Secure circuit boards to cage using top and bottom thumb screws. esults: Manufacturer's tests performed and completed on tape drive. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 4...
Page 69 235-105-210 October 1999 ® Procedure 4.6: PE FO M OPE ATIONAL TESTS ON KEYSTONE III TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW ® The operational tests described in this procedure are for the KEYSTONE tape drive. This procedure must be performed each time before making office backup tapes which are written in the EXT format. This is the format used by GENBKUP to make office backup tapes.
Page 70 235-105-210 October 1999 Unroll approximately (but not more than) 72 inches of scratch tape from the BOT. Attach the 1-inch reflective tape on the back half of the tape, on the side opposite to the one the BOT is on, 50 inches from the BOT.
Page 71 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.7: PE FO M PE IODIC TESTS ON PDF CHA GE CI CUIT OVE VIEW This procedure tests the power distribution frame (PDF) charge circuit (CHG CKT). This procedure should be performed on a periodic basis to ensure operational capability. t is important to verify the type of charge panel for the PDF cabinet.
Page 72 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Before performing this procedure, refer to the OVERV EW, Section 4.7 . CAUTION: Remove only a filter fuse in this step, not a load fuse. At the PDF, remove filter fuse one (FF1 location such as upper, center, and left) from the first equipped filter fuse panel. Wait approximately 10 seconds for the capacitor to discharge and the filter fuse LED (red) to light (DS2.2).
Page 73 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.8: IDENTIFY PATH TO BE NAILED UP/INSTALL CHANNEL UNIT OVE VIEW The remote digital terminal (RDT) channel unit which is to be nailed up can reside in any systems which conform to ® the TR08 or TR303 specification. Lucent RDT products which conform to these specifications are SLC 96 carrier system (TR08), SLC series 5 carrier system (TR08/TR303), and SLC-2000 carrier system (TR08/TR303).
Page 74 235-105-210 October 1999 sss = Switching module (SM) number Where: ii = DCU number rr = Remote terminal (that is, SLC carrier) number cccc = Channel number. For the DCLU, the equipment number is of the following format: S sssdrrcc sss = SM number Where: d = DCLU number...
Page 75 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.9: IMPLEMENT NAILUP TE MINATING AT EMOTE TE MINAL P OCEDU E dentify the path to be nailed up and install the channel unit in the remote terminal. Procedure 4.8 Reference: f the remote terminal is connected to a digital carrier line unit (DCLU), then provision the channel unit in the DCLU or if the remote terminal is connected to an integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU), then provision the channel unit in the DCU.
Page 76 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.10: P OVISION CHANNEL UNIT IN DCLU/IDCU OVE VIEW For administrative purposes, the foreign-exchange-subscriber/loop-start (FXS/LS) channel unit should be grown as an FXSLS type, and the foreign-exchange-office/loop-start (FXO/LS) channel unit should be grown as an SSV00 type.
Page 77 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: The CHANGE FIELD prompt is displayed. Press RETURN key. The ENTER COMMAND prompt is displayed. Type and enter U to update the office-dependent data (ODD). The FO M UPDATED is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. Response: Type and enter <...
Page 78 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.11: SET UP NAIL-UP CONNECTION P OCEDU E f the nail-up connection is for a trunk circuit, then remove the trunks from service, using the following commands, otherwise, go to Step 2. MV:T K,DEN=a-b-c-d[,UCL]; MV:T K,TEN(a,b,c,d,e)[,UCL]; a = Switching module (SM) number Where: b = Digital line and trunk unit (DLTU) number or the trunk unit (TU) number...
Page 79 235-105-210 October 1999 8. C ZCS 19. NC ZCS 9. C PATH1 DS1 __ 20. NC PATH1 DS1 __ 10. C PATH1 DS0 __ 21. NC PATH1 DS0 __ 11. C PATH2 DS0 __ 22. NC PATH2 DS0 __ Figure 4.11-1 ecent Change View 7.11 and Input Data Type and enter i to update office-dependent data (ODD).
Page 80 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.12: VE IFY THE NAILED-UP CONNECTION P OCEDU E At the master control center (MCC), type and enter: T C:UTIL,ILEN=s-i-r-c; [for a connection through the integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU)] T C:UTIL,SLEN=s-d-r-c; [for a connection through the digital carrier line unit (DCLU)] s = Switching module (SM) number Where: i = DCU number...
Page 81 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.13: IMPLEMENT T UNK-TO-T UNK NAILUP FO INT A-OFFICE APPLICATION P OCEDU E dentify trunks to be nailed up. Reference: Procedure 4.14 s connection to be set up using ABCD (FE - extended framing) signaling mode? f yes, continue with Step 3.
Page 82 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.14: IDENTIFY T UNKS OVE VIEW NOTE: The trunk ports to be nailed up may exist on a digital line trunk unit (DLTU), a trunk unit (TU), or a trunk unit channel board (TUCHBD). f the trunk is on a DLTU, the digital facility interface (DF ) to be used MUST be an ANN3B type.
Page 83 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.15: ECENT CHANGE DFI TO ABCD SIGMODE P OCEDU E MV:DFI=aaa-b-cc[,UCL]; Remove the digital facility interface(s) [DF (s)] from service: Response: The DF (s) will be removed from service. At recent change and verify (RC/V) terminal, type and enter: CV:MENU:APP C; Response: The main menu is displayed.
Page 84 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020, Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. NOTE 3: For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX), refer to 235-120-110, Very Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-120, Very Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide .
Page 85 235-105-210 October 1999 however, for a dual-stream office, the stream must be specified as either an ST1 or ST2. AMA option field should now read IS TAPE Response: At the MCC, type and enter: ALW:AMA:SESSION, a; Where: a = ST1 if AMA data goes to the ST1 data stream and ST2 if data goes to the ST2 data stream.
Page 86 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT AMA DISK SUMMA Y Response 1: PE CENT ON DISK NOT KNOWN THE E COULD BE P IMA Y AMA BLOCKS IN USE ON DISK EPT AMA DISK SUMMA Y Response 2: DISK IS CU ENTLY 0 PE CENT FULL NUMBE OF P IMA Y AMA BLOCKS IN USE IS APP OXIMATELY : 0 At the MCC, type and enter: OP:AMA:CONT OLFILE, a;...
Page 87 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.17: P OVISION NAILUP/HAI PIN CONNECTIONS IN IDCU/DCLU P OCEDU E To establish a connection through the integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU), at the master control center (MCC), type and enter: T C:UTIL,ILEN=s-i-r-c; s = Switching module (SM) number Where: i = DCU number r = Remote terminal (that is, SLC carrier) number...
Page 88 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.18: PE FO M MANUFACTU E 'S TESTS ON KS-23909, L21 SCSI 9-T ACK TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW The tests performed in this procedure will verify the operation of the KS-23909, L21 SCS 9-Track tape drive. These tests are internal drive tests.
Page 89 235-105-210 October 1999 When the test is complete, either PASS test number or FAIL test number is displayed. f the test passed and the test is to be repeated or another test is to be selected, press ENTE key or ESET key.
Page 90 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.19: PE FO M MANUFACTU E 'S TESTS ON KS-23909, L10 SCSI 9-T ACK TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW The tests performed in this procedure will verify the operation of the KS-23909, L10 SCS 9-Track tape drive. These tests are internal drive tests.
Page 91 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. THE MANUFACTU E 'S TESTS HAVE BEEN PE FO MED AND COMPLETED ON THE TAPE D IVE. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 92 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.20: PE FO M OPE ATIONAL TESTS ON SCSI 9-T ACK AND DAT D IVES OVE VIEW The operational tests described in this procedure are for the small computer system interface (SCS ) 9-Track and digital audio tape (DAT) drives. This procedure must be performed each time before making office backup tapes. Failure to successfully complete these tests could cause tape read/write failures, which, when these tapes are used to recover the system, may result in recovery failure.
Page 93 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, seek technical assistance. Make the tape media write-protected (remove write-enable ring on back of a 9-track tape reel, or push the write-protect tab to open position on the rear of the DAT drive cassette), and insert into the tape drive. f this is a DAT drive continue with Step 9.
Page 94 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.21: PE FO M MANUFACTU E 'S TESTS ON NC 006-3503341 and NC 006-3300608 SCSI DAT D IVE. OVE VIEW The internal drive tests performed in this procedure verifies the operation of the Small Computer System nterface (SCS ) Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive: SCSI DAT D IVE CI CUIT PACK...
Page 95 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.21.1: Drive Power-on Diagnostic Tests P OCEDU E nsert a write-enabled (write-protect tab pushed to closed position on the rear of the cassette of the DAT drive, Figure 4.21.1-2 ) "scratch" tape into the DAT drive. s the circuit pack OOS LED off? f NO, continue with the next step.
Page 96 235-105-210 October 1999 Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 97: Figure 4.21.1-2 Cassette Write Protect
235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 4.21.1-1 SCSI DAT Drive Circuit Pack, Front View [UN376,B (NC 006-3503341) or UN376C (NC 006-3300608)] Figure 4.21.1-2 Cassette Write Protect Copyright © 1999 Page 3...
Page 98 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020 , Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. NOTE 2: For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX), refer to 235-120-110, Very Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-120, Very Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide.
Page 99 235-105-210 October 1999 Tape, Procedure 4.24 . Tapes with headers should be supplied by the accounting center. At the MCC, type and enter: CPY:AMATAPE:P IM,MT=a, b; Where: a = Tape drive number. b = ST1 if AMA data goes to the ST1 data stream or ST2 if AMA data goes to the ST2 data stream.
Page 100 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT AMATAPE COMPLETE FO ST EAM a message is Wait until the green LED stops flashing and a printed, then remove the tape from drive using the Unload Tape from DAT Tape Drive, Procedure 4.25 . Label the AMA tape cartridge with the following: Date Time Written Start Block...
Page 101 235-105-210 October 1999 Data Transfer field should read: DATA T ANSFE IS NOT MANUALLY INHIBITED At the MCC, type and enter: ALW:AMA:SESSION, a; Where: a = ST1 if AMA data goes to the ST1 data stream or ST2 if AMA data goes to the ST2 data stream.
Page 102 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020 , Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. NOTE 2: For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX), refer to 235-120-110, Very Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-120, Very Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide .
Page 103 235-105-210 October 1999 k = Host collector (HOC) password. l = Backup HOC password. m = Password of the last HOC that polled this AMAT. n = ndicates whether or not a tape is writing or verification session is currently in progress. o = indicates whether or not a teleprocessing session is currently in process.
Page 104 235-105-210 October 1999 STA T BLOCK f g END BLOCK h i ECO DS W ITTEN j TAPE SEQUENCE NUMBE k Where: a = ST1 if information is for the ST1 data stream or ST2 if information is for the ST2 data stream.
Page 105 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT AMATAPE COMPLETE FO ST EAM a TE MINATION EQUESTED VIA STP:AMATAPE MESSAGE EPT AMATAPE COMPLETE FO ST EAM a T AILE LABELS COULD NOT BE W ITTEN EPT AMATAPE COMPLETE FO ST EAM a AUTOMATIC TAPE W ITING STOP TIME WAS EACHED EPT AMATAPE COMPLETE FO ST EAM a INVALID TE MINATION EASON SPECIFIED Where:...
Page 106 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. f NO, there is more data to be read (y greater than zero). f you want to read this data (that is, in a software transition), continue with the next step, otherwise go to Step 14.
Page 107 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020 , Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. NOTE 3: For specific information on the 5ESS-2000 Switch Very Compact Digital Exchange (VCDX), refer to 235-120-110, Very Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-120, Very Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide .
Page 108 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 4.25: LOAD TAPE INTO DAT TAPE D IVE P OCEDU E Verify that the tape cartridges write-protect switch is set correctly. For write-protection the light-colored tab should NOT be visible. For write- enable, the tab should be visible. Check the LEDs on the tape drive front panel to make sure the drive is not currently functioning.
Page 109 These detailed level procedures are for program update, office backup methods, office dependent data (ODD) backup, ODD recovery, editing the data base using the office data base editor (ODBE), and software release retrofit. Other detailed memory alteration procedural information can be found in the following Lucent Technologies documents: ...
Page 110 Software Change Administration and Notification System (SCANS) for distribution. SCANS: The SCANS is a Lucent Technologies time-shared computer system for orderly software update distribution. Maintenance personnel who subscribe to SCANS may access SCANS daily to receive and record the software updates.
Page 111: Figure 5-1 Program Update Distribution
235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 5-1 Program Update Distribution 5.3.2 SOFTWA E UPDATE FO MAT The software update format, illustrated in Figure 5-2 , consists of at least four files: Header File: The header file contains the necessary information for maintaining the integrity of the software update.
Page 112: Figure 5-2 Software Update Structure
235-105-210 October 1999 updated object files for target processes. SCANS nformation File: The SCANS information file contains the software update number, software release(s) affected, general descriptive information, name and size of each file to be updated, associated software update(s), customer assistance request (CAR) numbers, and the name of the person to contact in case of trouble.
Page 113: Figure 5-3 Example Of A Message File
235-105-210 October 1999 " interval and yield the expected results. " " Run a call volume with PROCALL and observe that there are no power " ring failures. " " "BKOUT.********************************************************************" " " If during the installation of this BWM, or at any time "...
Page 114 After priming, a delivery request is made to SCANS for the binary data packages. This request, which is usually made from a dial-up terminal between SCANS and the SCC, issues a binary overwrite (BOW) command to SCANS. The BOW command includes the 5ESS-2000 switch office name, the identification of the software updates, and a transaction D.
Page 115 235-105-210 October 1999 Assuming that the binary update files have been received and verified, the BX.25 data link is automatically terminated. 5.3.4.3 Verification A process is provided by the program update subsystem to verify software updates before overwriting the resident software release.
Page 116 These immediate corrections are known as emergency fixes. Emergency fixes are accomplished on a word-by-word basis under the direction of Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support (CTS) [formerly Product Engineering Control Center (PECC)].
Page 117 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: The UPD:BKOUT:UPNM; message only restores the words specified in the change. f memory other than that specified in this change is mutilated, a system BOOT may be required to restore the switching system to normal. 5.5 SPACE ECLAMATION 5.5.1 ECLAIM SPACE IN SOFTWA E UPDATE STO AGE DI ECTO Y /etc/bwm As software updates are brought into /etc/bwm and activated, the space available in /etc/bwm for future software...
Page 118 235-105-210 October 1999 and aborts session. updates received from SCANS. (2) Enter second request for transmission of remaining software updates. (3) f problem persists, contact SCANS administrator. Unrecoverable conditions detected by File transfer session terminated. (1) Verify and install applicable software the retrieve process.
Page 119 235-105-210 October 1999 updates. (3) f problem persists, contact PECC. 5.7 ENHANCED P OG AM UPDATE CAPABILITIES The enhanced program update uses a menu-driven craft interface. This interface provides a user friendly program update procedure which simplifies software update installation. These enhancements eliminate the need for lengthy input messages that must be entered precisely.
Page 120 235-105-210 October 1999 _____________________________________________________________________________ Figure 5-4 Easy BWM Installation Page 1940 SYS EMER CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR BLDG/PWR BLDG INH CKT LIM SYS NORM OVERLOAD SYS INH AM PERPH OS LINKS MISC ________________________________________________________________________________ _________1960 - BWM INSTALLATION BWM = BWM89-0001 9000,Y START BWM Y 9 70 NEXT WINDOW 91xx DISPLAY...
Page 121 Sequencing checks are made between software updates to ensure proper sequencing for all software updates in a 5ESS-2000 switch. To select a particular software update, the START software update poke is entered along with the desired software update number.
Page 122 The display pokes provide an on-line log of history of all software updates installed into the current software release issue in a 5ESS-2000 switch office. The history of a software update (Figures 5-6 and 5-7 ) consists of, but is not limited to, the following information: ...
Page 123 235-105-210 October 1999 update in the 5ESS-2000 switch. f all software updates in the active log have been made official and memory space used by the old version of the replaced functions has been reclaimed, the history of these software updates may be stored in the archive log to conserve disk space.
Page 124 235-105-210 October 1999 official before the space is cleared. The space occupied by all software updates which have been made official may be cleared by typing "9600,BWM=nn-nnnn", or the space occupied by a single software update can be cleared by typing 9600 followed by a comma and the specific software update name.
Page 125: Figure 5-6 Typical Bwm History Of An Am Update
235-105-210 October 1999 Transaction = 0x8: NEW RELEASE OF FILE File Update Type = 0x41: KILLABLE PROCESS SUPERVISOR PROCESS Status = 0xc: INSTALLED Official Pfile Path = /no text/prc/fpump Working Pfile Path = Bound Upd File Path = New OFC Pfile Path = Saved BOLO FN/UPD Path = Saved BOLO DF File Path = .m Update file Path[0] = /etc/bwm/BWM89-0001/fpump...
Page 126: Figure 5-7 Typical Bwm History Of An Sm Update
235-105-210 October 1999 Working Pfile Path = /no text/im/D.basic/___IM.out Bound Upd File Path = /updtmp/UpdFilbIM New OFC Pfile Path = Saved BOLO FN/UPD Path = Saved BOLO DF File Path = .m Update file Path[0] = /etc/bwm/BWM89-0002/PCtrnsch_c.m Updated function PCloss has new address of 0xf3034 Figure 5-7 Typical BWM History of an SM Update Figure 5-8 Switching Module Inhibit and ecovery Control Page 1800 Copyright ©...
Page 127 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 5-9 Communication Module Processor Inhibit and ecovery Control Page1850 Copyright © 1999 Page 19...
Page 128 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 5-10 Communication Module Processor Inhibit and ecovery Control Page1851 UPD VFYCON IN PROGRESS UPD VFYCON - TABLE OF INCONSISTENCIES FOLLOWS UPNM UPD NUMBER TYPE PROCESSOR BWM88-0001 ISLU-CC : STATUS UNIT INCONSISTENT ISLUCC=3-1-0 REMOVE/RESTORE INCONSISTENT PERIPHERALS BWM88-0001 PSU-PH : STATUS UNIT...
Page 129 CAUTION: The GENBKUP procedure could abort if the 5ESS-2000 switch contains a software update in the temporary state. This would be caused by differences between the incore version and the disk version created by a temporary software update.
Page 130 235-105-210 October 1999  b: Copy DAT to DAT (5E10)  q: To Quit. f either d or t is entered, a second page is displayed asking "Which software disk is to be updated?", or (for tape) which "Tape Drive to use?". The system then updates several disk partitions and runs a number of audits and compares before generating the backup entities.
Page 131  ODD - AM ODD tape and SM ODD tape(s) at the same RC level. 5.10.3 BACKUP LEVELS 5.10.3.1 General There are four levels of backups possible in the 5ESS switch 5ESS-2000 switch, depending upon the type of disks equipped. These levels are as follows: Memory to primary-disk backup...
Page 132 GENBKUP does and what the expected outcome is at each step. This section provides additional information about the program for help in troubleshooting GENBKUP problems. t is assumed that the user of this document is familiar with the 5ESS-2000 switch and the GENBKUP procedure. 5.10.4.2 General Information ®...
Page 133 235-105-210 October 1999 No other GENBKUP is running. Checks for the presence of /tmp/.genbkupLOCK file and, if found, asks the user if they wish to terminate the other GENBKUP. Change directory to /cft/shl. Check sums (sum -r) of /no5text/bkup/*.ptn files against the values stored in /no5text/bkup/bkupsum file.
Page 134 235-105-210 October 1999 f no software update activity is detected, and root, etc, and db are mounted on primary: Backup to Tape Physical Tape Verification Check LDFT Tape Header Software Disk Backup Update and Verify Disks Verify Disk Data rt) Restart Tape Sequence (If either TXT or ODD allowed, see previous Step I.13) rd) Restart Sftw Bkup Disk (If both TXT and ODD allowed, see previous Step I.13)
Page 135 235-105-210 October 1999 x) SM Text (See Note 2) s) SM ODD n) No more Selection NOTE 1: AM TEXT not displayed if any of the following conditions are true: 1. Software update activity is detected. 2. root, etc, and db are on backup partitions. 3.
Page 136 235-105-210 October 1999 (iii) Display Page 5 of ``AM TEXT VER F CAT ON'' and execute VFY:FILE,FLIST="/no5text/bkup/C Cfile"; message. (iv) f COPY:PTN,ALL (copy root, etc, db, and boot partitions to broot, betc, bdb, and bboot partitions or vice versa depending on which are mounted) has not been done already during this GENBKUP session, display ``ROOT TO BACKUP ROOT PART T ON COPY'' page and execute all the messages displayed on the screen OP:MHD=0/1,INFO, VFY:MHD=0/1, and...
Page 137 235-105-210 October 1999 inhibited, the user is given a choice of inhibiting RC for the entire time or a part of the time. For the 5E10 software release, if the office is equipped with a 3B21D and a DAT, the recent changes will be inhibited only during the final steps.
Page 138 235-105-210 October 1999 PTN="/dev/vtocb1" if MHD=xx was picked by the user). Restore MHD=xx and copy from active disk to backup disk with: COPY:SPDISK:S C="/no5text/bkup/prmdsk.ptn", DEST="/no5text/bkup/bkdsk1.ptn" (or bkdsk2.ptn). u) Update and Verify Disks: f BKUP:ODD has not been run already during this GENBKUP session, then run BKUP:ODD (see AM TEXT steps for more detail).
Page 139 235-105-210 October 1999 dentical to ``Top Tape'' in ``Backup to Tape'' option. rd) Restart Sftw Bkup Disk: Display conditions under which this option is allowed and ask for ``go'' input. The rest of the steps are identical to ``Software Disk Backup'' option described earlier except that partition verifications and BKUP:ODD are not run here.
Page 140 235-105-210 October 1999 "BKUP *ODD.* *NOT *STARTED" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="%s" Wait time=1200 sec.; search interval=3 sec. Success string: " ARE *EQUAL" Failure strings: " MISMATCH" " FAILED *OPEN" "CMPR *DISK *CORE *STOPPED" COPY:ACTDI K:MHD=14, RC="/dev/vtoc",PTN="/dev/vtocb1" COPY:ACTDI K:MHD=15, RC="/dev/vtoc",PTN="/dev/vtocb2" Wait time=3000 sec.; search interval=6 sec. Success string: "COPY *ACTDISK...
Page 141 235-105-210 October 1999 Success strings: "COPY *FILESYS *FILE *COMPLETED" "COPY *PTN .* *COMPLETED" Failure strings: "COPY *FILESYS *FILE *STOPPED" "COPY *PTN .* *STOPPED" "DISK *ACCESS" "ABORTED *CODE" INIT:MHD=14,VFY Wait time= 400 sec.; search interval=8 sec. Success string: "INIT *MHD *COMPLETED" Failure strings: "INIT *MHD...
Page 142 235-105-210 October 1999 "OP *MHD *INFO *ERROR" "OP *MHD *INFO *ABORTED" "MHD *1.* *INIT" "MHD *1.* *GROW" "MHD *1.* *UNEQIP" "MHD *1.* *OFL" "MHD *1.* *UNAV" "MHD *1.* *OOS" OP:MHD=14:INFO Wait time=240 sec.; search interval=3 sec. Success strings: "MHD *14.* *OOS"...
Page 143 235-105-210 October 1999 Success strings: "RMV *MHD *COMPLETED" "RMV *MHD *STOPPED *H' " Failure strings: "RMV *MHD *ABORTED" "RMV *MHD *STOPPED" RMV:MTC=0 Wait time=180 sec.; search interval=3 sec. Success strings: "RMV *MTC *COMPLETED" "RMV *MTC *STOPPED *H' " Failure strings: "RMV *MTC *ABORTED"...
Page 144 235-105-210 October 1999 Wait time=1800 sec.; search interval= sec. Success string: "VFY *MHD *COMPLETED" Failure strings: "VFY *MHD *NOT *STARTED" "VFY *MHD *STOPPED" "VFY *MHD *ERROR" "VFY *MHD *ABORTED" "VFY *MHD *EARLY *TERM *VERIFY" VFY:TAPE,TD="":RETRY=3 VFY:TAPE,TD=%s:RETRY=%s, E =%s,VOL=%s,VERBO E Wait time= 400 sec.; search interval=6 sec. Success strings: "MISMATCHES.* *0.*...
Page 145 235-105-210 October 1999 /no text/bkup/sodd1.ptn /no text/bkup/sodd2.ptn /no text/bkup/sodd3.ptn /no text/bkup/sodd4.ptn /no text/bkup/sodd .ptn /no text/bkup/sodd6.ptn /no text/bkup/text.ptn /no text/bkup/xtrafs.ptn f GENBKUP cannot access any of the previous files, GENBKUP will fail. The file /no5text/rcv/aimrc is used to find out if currently official AM ODD is on no5aodd1 or on no5aodd2. This information is used to decide if it is needed to run BKUP:ODD,AM after the full BKUP:ODD is done.
Page 146 235-105-210 October 1999 The file /updtmp/.genbkupCHK contains information on when the last BKUP:ODD and COPY:PTN were done. The information is then used to decide if the restart option may be allowed. f either or both were done within last 24 hours, certain restart options are offered in the initial menu (provided other conditions are met).
Page 147 235-105-210 October 1999 exist. You must seek appropriate technical assistance to correct the situation. nput Message Time-Out f GENBKUP aborts due to the expiration of the waiting period (``time-out''), GENBKUP prints the expired input message on the ROP. Check the ROP and investigate if the message ever completed. f the message never completes or completion message never arrives, investigate the cause and correct the situation.
Page 148 235-105-210 October 1999 5.11.4 ODD BACKUP TO TAPE The frequency of the ODD backup to tape will depend on how often an ODD backup (from main store to disk) is performed in the particular office. The ODD backups should be performed on a regular basis. The appropriate time to schedule an ODD disk image backup to tape is before an ODD backup.
Page 149 235-105-210 October 1999 5.12.2 O IGINATION Origination for ODD backup is under local control. Local control is required for the following reasons: The ODD backup is run ``on demand.'' After the first initialization of the office, the dynamic head blocks stored in the ODD must be backed up. 5.12.3 F EQUENCY The frequency of ODD backup depends on the disk space allocated to log regular RCs and CORCs and the number of these changes in the system.
Page 150 235-105-210 October 1999 A stable or transient clear backs out all RCs and CORCs entered since the last ODD backup. This is because system initialization restores the memory version of the ODD with the disk version created by the most recent ODD backup.
Page 151 235-105-210 October 1999  Multiline Hunt Group (MLHG) member  MLHG  Trunk Member  Trunk Group  Relation on a particular processor (referred to as a Relation/Processor Entity Audit).  All relations on a particular processor (referred to as a Processor Entity Audit). Each audit execution produces a summary message indicating how many errors were found by the audit.
Page 152 235-105-210 October 1999 older than these criteria. 5.14.3 USE PE SPECTIVES  When the audit is first deployed in an office, a default schedule will be automatically established to cause the Full audit to run continuously. The user may enter an input message to reestablish the daily start/suspend schedule of the Full audit.
Page 153 235-105-210 October 1999 relation and processor that was being processed last). The following input command modifies an entry for the schedule: SCHED:AUD=SODD,DAY=a,STA TTIME=b,DU ATION=c Where: a = MON | TUE | WED | THU | F I | SAT | SUN | ALL b = Starting time in the form HH-MM c = Duration in the form HH-MM (minimum 1 hour) Multiple sessions can be created for a day, but it is advisable to have one continuous session.
Page 154 235-105-210 October 1999 5.14.5 STOPPING THE AUDIT 5.14.5.1 Full Audit The STP command stops the current execution of the Full audit. The audit starts automatically at the next scheduled time. The STP commands returns an OK irrespective of whether an audit is running or not. STP:AUD=SODD,FULL f the STP command has been used, the EXC command can be used to restart the Full audit again (provided the schedule allows it).
Page 155 235-105-210 October 1999 hours from when the audit was stopped, the Processor Entity audit will resume from the point at which it left off during its previous execution.  f, after the audit has been stopped, the same EXC command that was used to start it is re-entered more than 24 hours from when the audit was stopped, the Processor Entity audit will start from the beginning (that is with the first relation on the processor).
Page 156 235-105-210 October 1999 An example of a Standard Error Message along with the associated PRL source is as follows: RLfc_line.R, line 2 1 RULE: for fc_line in RLfc_line begin if(fc_line.port.member{12:1 } equals 0xf) then begin find exactly 1 bfgmatch in RLbfgmatch on am where(bfgmatch.bfgid equals fc_line.bfgid) when_found begin...
Page 157 RULE FRAGMENT FROM WITHIN A FUNCTION BODY (TO VIEW THE COMPLETE RULE, PLEASE REFER TO THE PRL ON-LINE LISTINGS, WHICH CAN BE ACCESSED VIA DIAL-UP CONNECTION TO THE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES IDS DOCUMENTATION.): find greater than or equal to 1 islupidb in RLislupidb on sm(rc_tur.module) where(islupidb.picb equals rc_eqloc.picb - 1);...
Page 158 RULE FRAGMENT FROM WITHIN A FUNCTION BODY (TO VIEW THE COMPLETE RULE, PLEASE REFER TO THE PRL ON-LINE LISTINGS, WHICH CAN BE ACCESSED VIA DIAL-UP CONNECTION TO THE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES IDS DOCUMENTATION.) The following APPLICATION/PHRASES entered on the ANNHD form (view 8.61) do not have the corresponding APPLICATION/PHRASE ID entered on the PHRASE form (view 8.63) .
Page 159 235-105-210 October 1999 CONTEXT for Error 1: <current_pcr=1> <annc_hdr=<ANNC_HDR:processor=1:appl=FCOSPS_DA hdr_id=76 6>> <nappl=OSPSDA> <hdr_id=76 6> <phrase1=12043> When the audits run, they create an error log file in the switch that is in binary format and is unreadable. An input command is provided to read this file and produce readable error messages. The command sends the output to a user-specified file, which is created under the /rclog/SODD/reports directory.
Page 160 235-105-210 October 1999 The following syntax is to be used when inserting text into the "prl_to_ignore" file: Example Message Meaning *:R*:Warn: gnores all RC warnings RLfc_line.R:R_003:Warn: gnores a specific warning in relation FC_L NE RLannc_hdr.R:O*:Error: Treats all ODA warnings as errors inrelation ANNC_HDR t is important to note that the .R file name, label, and action MUST be in the file in the format RL<relation_name>.R:<label>:<action>: This "prl_to_ignore"...
Page 161 235-105-210 October 1999 of {-1, 0, 1-192, 193, 194} will be treated as bad. bad: Bad combination, returns DBBADPCR, -123. rodd: Redundant ODD file is source of tuple/parameter. pcr: The processor's ODD file is used for the tuple/parameter read. nomatch: Data base manager returns DBNOMATCH on this read. appl: Read parameter GLp<application>...
Page 162 NOTE: The number of relations supported by the SODD audit is subject to change! New relations may be added from time to time via a Software Update (SU) when Lucent Technologies decides that it is critical for those relations to be audited.
Page 163: Figure 5-12 Automated Sodd File Structure
235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 5-12 shows the structure of the files used and created by the Automated SODD audit. Figure 5-12 Automated SODD File Structure As shown in Figure 5-12 , the "reports" directory contains all of the error reports and summaries created by using the OP:AUD=SODD,E LOG command with the outfile=k option.
Page 164 235-105-210 October 1999 ODD backup. f these PRC<prcid>log files continue to increase in size, possibly affecting the ncremental's chance of completing the PRC<prcid>bk file, they will be removed and audited in the Full audit sequence. The "errlog" directory contains the binary version of the errors created by running the audits (Full, ncremental and Entity).
Page 165  /rclog/SODD/prl_to_ignore Optional ASC file the 5ESS-2000 switch owner maintains that lists the PRL warnings to ignore or treat differently during a dump of the error logs. Refer to section 5.14.7.2 on how this file is manipulated/used.
Page 166 235-105-210 October 1999 The Full, ncremental, and Processor Entity audits use the backup copy of the ODD on the disk and the RC logfiles to do their processing. This is done to ensure minimum or no impact on the Recent Change throughput. Hence the data that is audited may not include all the Recent Changes that were done since the last backup of the ODD.
Page 167 The On-Switch ECD Audit will allow switch owners to verify the integrity of their ECD data base. The audit is invoked either via an input message or a scheduling mechanism. Lucent Technologies recommends that the audit be run regularly as part of routine switch maintenance in order to identify and correct any ECD data base errors as they may occur.
Page 168 235-105-210 October 1999 Some of the main events for the On-Switch ECD Audit are as follows:  Scheduling: Schedule automatic execution of the Audit for routine maintenance. (SCHED:ECDAUD)  Running: Manual or Automatic execution of the audit. (EXC:ECDAUD)  Stopping: nput of the stop command will abort execution of a currently running audit. (STOP:ECDAUD) ...
Page 169 The Feature Activation Counting and Reconciliation (FACR) program is a new process designed to provide the customer the ability to monitor feature usage in their 5ESS-2000 switches and provides Lucent Technologies a vehicle for billing the customer for assigned software features. Release 1 of FACR has the ability to count a subset of the existing feature packages.
Page 170 PC via the communication software. The customer has control over which 5ESS-2000 switch FACR output files that the Lucent Technologies PC is allowed to access by the type of FACR audit that is executed on the 5ESS-2000 switch (Refer to Section 5.16.3 for further details).
Page 171 When the audit is run with the OFC type, both the customer and Lucent Technologies will have access to the FACR data once the files have been retrieved from the 5ESS-2000 switch and stored on the FACR-RSCANS computer. f the customer wants the data access to be restricted to just their PCs, then the UNOFC request type should be used.
Page 172 235-105-210 October 1999 9257d012.94u The unofficial data file is created when the "UNOFC" parameter is used in the input message. This data file is only accessible by the Customer PCs. 9257d012.94d The detail data file is created when the "DETA L" parameter is used in the "EXC:FACR" input message.
Page 173 Software release retrofit refers to the implementation of a new software release (for example, 5E12). The new software release is delivered to the office on a magnetic tape supplied by Lucent Technologies. Prior to a software release retrofit, all units should be operational.
Page 174 235-105-210 October 1999  235-106-201, Software Release Update Procedures  235-106-300, Large Terminal Growth Procedures  235-106-301, Large Terminal Growth Procedures  235-600-700, Input Message Manual  235-600-750, Output Message Manual. Copyright © 1999 Page 66...
Page 175 235-105-210 October 1999 6. MEMO Y ALTE ATION P OCEDU ES GENE AL ® Section 6 contains detailed level procedures of the changes that are possible within the ESS -2000 switch data base. These detailed level procedures are for program update, office backup methods, office dependent data (ODD) backup, ODD recovery, editing the data base using the office data base editor (ODBE), and software release retrofit.
Page 176 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.1: EQUEST SUMMA Y/LONG SUMMA Y OF SOFTWA E UPDATES P OCEDU E ® NOTE: All communications between the ESS -2000 switch office and Software Change Administration and Notification System (SCANS) are via a full-duplex, 1200-baud dial-up terminal. s SCANS linked up? f YES, proceed to Step 4.
Page 177 235-105-210 October 1999 aa = Month in which first software update of range was issued. Where: bb = Day on which first software update of range was issued. cc = Year in which first software update of range was issued. dd = Month in which last software update of range was issued.
Page 178 235-105-210 October 1999 L B - Library/Utility B N - Binary change. Response: Summary of software updates (if any) by type option. At SCANS terminal, type and enter: BWM,O a (SUMMARY and/or LONG SUMMARY) Where: a = office name. ® Response: Hard copy printout of software update text and overwrite data for ESS -2000 switch office.
Page 179 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.2: OBTAIN SOFTWA E UPDATE STATUS EPO T P OCEDU E s SCANS link up? f YES, proceed to Step 3. f NO, continue with the next step. Access SCANS per local instructions. At SCANS terminal, type and enter: STA, L, U a Where: a = Office name.
Page 180 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.3: SCHEDULE MAKING SOFTWA E UPDATE(s) OFFICIAL P OCEDU E Obtain software update status report. Procedure 6.2 Reference: Dependent on results of Step 1, do A or B. BWMs DUE, continue with Step 3: NO BWMs DUE: Wait approximately 1 day.
Page 181 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.4: INSTALL SOFTWA E UPDATE P OCEDU E Check/make OFF C AL software updates in the soak state in the switch. Procedure 6.5 Reference: Load software updates. From SCANS or Tape: Procedure 6.7 Reference: Make listing of software updates loaded into switch. Make software updates OFF C AL.
Page 182 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.5: CHECK/MAKE OFFICIAL THE TEMPO A Y SOFTWA E UPDATES OVE VIEW NOTE: n this procedure, the term ``software updates in the soak state'' does not refer to an actual temporary software update, but rather to a software update that has not yet been made official. (BWMs in temporary state.) P OCEDU E On master control center (MCC) Page 1950, to display temporary software updates, type and enter: 9103...
Page 183 235-105-210 October 1999 On MCC Page 1960, type and enter: 9320 to execute soak section of message file. SOAK SECTION COMPLETED: SOAK SECTION Response: Using information contained in SOAK section of message file, has soak interval for this software update completed? f YES, go to Step 12.
Page 184 235-105-210 October 1999 Copyright © 1999 Page 3...
Page 185 Thread tape onto drive following local procedures. NOTE: The KS-23909, L10 is an auto-load tape drive. Threading of tape onto take-up reel is not required. Refer to Lucent Technologies KS-23909, L(40) Information Manual for the KS-23909 1600/62 0 CPI Recorder (with SCSI Interface).
Page 186 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.7: LOAD SOFTWA E UPDATE(s) F OM SCANS/O TAPE OVE VIEW There is a 24-hour time limit imposed from the time the switch is primed until SCANS must begin the data session. f SCANS puts the binary overwrite (BOW) request in the queue, it may take up to that 24-hour limit to start sending data to the switch.
Page 187 235-105-210 October 1999 total 17 1 drwxrwxrwx 8 root 416 Mar 1 10:30 . 10 drwxr-xr-x 8 root 5024 Mar 2 11:00 .. 1 drwxrwxrwx 2 root 192 Mar 2 10:58 930011 ..1 drwxrwxrwx 2 root 112 Mar 1 10:30 930016 f BWM(s) or update(s) appear in this file, down load, and repeat from Step 5.
Page 188 235-105-210 October 1999 At master control center (MCC), type and enter: COPY:TAPE:ATA,IN,TD="/dev/mt08",BSDI ="/etc/bwm"; Response: COPY TAPE IN COMPLETED At MCC, type and enter: VFY:"BWMaaaaaa"; a = 6-digit software update number. Where: VFY BWM Response: aaaa bb-bbbb c [d] [e] s "c" = OK or NG? f OK, continue to Step 20.
Page 189 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: VFY:BWMaaaaaa; a = 6-digit software update number. Where: VFY BWM Response: aaaa bb-bbbb c [d] [e] s "c" = OK or NG? f OK, go to Step 19. f NG, seek technical assistance. STOP.
Page 190 235-105-210 October 1999 ® ® Procedure 6.8: EMOVE/UNMOUNT TAPE F OM KEYSTONE II O KEYSTONE 9-T ACK TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW ® NOTE: For specific information on the ESS -2000 Switch Compact Digital Exchange (CDX), refer to 235-120-010, Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide and 235-120-020, Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide. P OCEDU E s tape moving? f YES, continue with the next step.
Page 191 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.9: MAKE SOFTWA E UPDATE(S) OFFICIAL P OCEDU E Determine if breakpoints have been set in the switch. NOTE: Breakpoints must be removed before continuing. Type and enter the following: Input Output esponse if Breakpoint(s) Exist For SM: op:ut,sm=1&&192,util;...
Page 192 235-105-210 October 1999 Review message file for events that will take place during activation, or any special actions which must be accomplished manually. On MCC Page 1960, enter command 9310 to apply software update in a temporary mode. Response: EXECUTE ALL COMPLETED: APPLY SECTION Using printout of message file, does the software update affect any of the following switching module (SM) pumpable peripherals? ...
Page 193 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, go to Step 20. Pick software update with the next higher sequence number. Repeat from Step 5. On MCC Page 1950, enter command 9600,BWMnn-nnnn to clear software updates. COMPLETED to right of poke. Response: Note: Check "/etc/bwm" file. esults: BWM(s) made OFF C AL.
Page 194 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.10: BACKOUT SOFTWA E UPDATE OVE VIEW NOTE: To backout the last official software update, refer to Procedure 6.29 . P OCEDU E This procedure should not be performed if any recent change activities are in progress. Verification of recent change activity should be done before continuing.
Page 195 235-105-210 October 1999  Local digital services function (LDSF)  Recorded announcement function (RAF)  Service announcement System (SAS)  DSU2 integrated services test facility ( STF)  Global digital services function (GDSF)  Protocol handler 4 for SDN application (PH4 ) ...
Page 196 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.11: OBTAIN ODD BACKUP SCHEDULE P OCEDU E NOTE: NG is printed if no office dependent data (ODD) schedule is in existence. At master control center (MCC), type and enter: OP:BKUPSTAT; Response: OP BKUPSTAT [FULL] {AM | N ODD=a [TO b] | CMP=c [TO d] | AM N ODD=a [TO b] | AM CMP=c [TO d] | AM N ODD=a [TO b] CMP=c [TO d] | ODD=a | AM ODD=a | AM N ODD=a [TO b] CMP=c [TO d] ODD=a |...
Page 197 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.12: SCHEDULE AUTOMATIC ODD BACKUP OVE VIEW This procedure requests to schedule the ODD backup to run periodically at specific intervals. NOTE: During heavy recent change activity, an ODD backup has a slight chance of aborting because of a lack of resources for the backup to execute.
Page 198 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.13: CANCEL ODD BACKUP SCHEDULE P OCEDU E NOTE: The 5E9 and later software releases will allow the same parameters as BKUP:ODD:EVE Y in order to delete selected schedules. At master control center (MCC), type and enter: CL :ODDBKUP; CL ODD BKUP COMPLETED Response: NOTE: f no office dependent data (ODD) backup schedule is in existence, CL ODD BKUP STOPPED is...
Page 199 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.14: PE FO M FULL ODD BACKUP P OCEDU E NOTE 1: All switching modules (SM), communication module processors (CMP), and the administrative module (AM) must be up and running. n addition, the switch must not be in an OVERLOAD condition.
Page 200 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.15: ABO T IN-P OG ESS ODD BACKUP P OCEDU E NOTE: f this command is input while a switching module (SM) is being backed up, the processes involved will wait for the SM to complete before the abort takes effect. At master control center (MCC), in order to abort an in-progress office dependent data (ODD) backup, type and enter: ABT:ODDBKUP! Response:...
Page 201 The core to primary partition backup is done any time changes to the office text or data are made permanent such ® as committing to Lucent Technologies 3B20/21 computer or ESS -2000 switch recent changes or software updates. The backup consists of saving the changes in memory by writing to the primary disk partitions. Once the memory changes are made permanent, they are available on disk for automatic recovery situations that require boots.
Page 202 235-105-210 October 1999 has not been activated)? f YES, continue to Step 10. f NO, continue to Step 30. Access MCC Page 199. ecent Change and Verify Response: cursor positioned at database_name: Type and enter: incore Cursor moves to reviewonly: Response: Type and enter: n Cursor moves to journaling:...
Page 203 235-105-210 October 1999 Cursor moves to reviewonly Response: Type and enter: n Cursor moves to journaling: Response: To bypass other options, type and enter: * Response: At top right-hand corner of screen: - executing... displayed - FO M EXECUTED displayed Cursor at Enter Form Name: Type and enter: trbegin Cursor at 1.tr_name:T BEGIN...
Page 204 235-105-210 October 1999 between the BKUP ODD APPCP COMPLETED and BKUP ODD COMPLETED during which the final ODD copy is made. Type and enter: BKUP:ODD; Response: BKUP ODD IN P OG ESS . . . BKUP N ODD SM=a COMPLETED .
Page 205 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.17: COPY P IMA Y DISK PA TITIONS TO BACKUP DISK PA TITIONS OVE VIEW This backup is performed prior to making changes permanent to data, program, or other files in the root partitions. These are partitions other than /no5text. These changes are the result of software updates, ECD changes, or file edits.
Page 206 235-105-210 October 1999 . . . ST MHD x IN P OG ESS (will be output every 2 minutes) . . . ST MHD x COMPLETED esults: Primary disk partitions copied to backup disk partitions. Table 6.17-1 Contents of /no5test/bkup/prim.ptn and bkup.ptn prim.ptn bkup.ptn...
Page 207 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.18: PE FO M DIFFE ENTIAL ODD BACKUP OVE VIEW A ``differential'' office dependent data (ODD) backup will copy only those pages which have been changed since the last backup. P OCEDU E NOTE 1: All switching modules (SM), communication module processors (CMP), and the administrative module (AM) must be up and running.
Page 208 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.19: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 209 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.20: DOWNLOAD UPDATES TO SM PUMPABLE PE IPHE AL UNITS OVE VIEW NOTE: This procedure should be run only as a last resort. The UPD:PMPPE F commands in the message file should be able to automatically remove and restore the affected peripheral units, which would pump them. f the UPD:PMPPE F command repeatedly fails, and no office hardware is defective, seek technical assistance.
Page 210 235-105-210 October 1999 f ISLU, continue to Step 2. f PH16, go to Step 10. f PH128, ODMA, PH2A, PH2G, PH3C, OIOP, PH4I, IP4I, IP4F, PHV1C, or PHA1A, go to Step 16. f AF, SAS, go to Step 22. f LDSU,LDSF,GDSF, go to Step 28. f ISTF, go to Step 34.
Page 211 235-105-210 October 1999 or PH128 and ODMA updates simultaneously; or both PH3C and O OP updates simultaneously. or both PH4 and P4 or P4F updates simultaneously. or both PHV1C updates. or both PHA1A updates. Enter command 2xx to remove the protocol handler (PH) to be updated. xx = PH number (00-15).
Page 212 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter command 1110,x to access the STF display page. x = SM number. Where: Enter command 20x to remove STF x. x = STF unit to be removed (0-3). Where: Enter command 30x,UCL to restore STF x. Where: x = STF unit to be restored.
Page 213 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.21: MAKE FULL OFFICE BACKUP DISK 5E10 and LATE OVE VIEW CAUTION: During normal operations, work within a couple of file systems can trigger UNIX* file system alarms. These alarms normally warn the switch owner of situations where a file system is likely to run out of file space unless actions are taken to prevent the space exhaustion.
Page 214 235-105-210 October 1999 P OCEDU E DESC IPTION This section gives an overview of the backup procedure. Those sections of the procedure that can make use of GENBKUP are noted. Those sections noted with ``GENBKUP -v option'' are sections that can be run separately by using the verify option of GENBKUP.
Page 215 235-105-210 October 1999 SCS 9-Track and DAT, Procedure 4.20 Note: The manufacturer's tests previously performed on the KEYSTONE III tape drive, are no longer required. Caution: "TMP" software updates installed on the switch that is/are not official may cause abnormal terminations of steps in this procedure.
Page 216 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, continue to next Step. f NO, go to Step 12. Stop each active and/or scheduled REX diagnostics dump. At the MCC, type and enter: STOP:DMQ,AM,ACTIVE; STOP:DMQ,AM,WAITING; To display temporary software update(s), on MCC Page 1950, type and enter 9103 temporary software update(s).
Page 217 Section 6.21.3 . 6.21.2 Initialize GENBKUP Caution: This procedure could abort if the 5ESS-2000 switch contains a software update in the temporary state. This would be due to differences between the incore version and the disk version created by a temporary software update.
Page 218 235-105-210 October 1999 Note: The next display will not come out if the office has never made a full office backup. GENBKUP PROCEDURE LAST SUCCESSFUL BACKUP COPY PARTITION ALL CMD DONE ON xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx 19xx AM TEXT TAPE SEQUENCE MADE ON xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx 19xx SM TEXT TAPE SEQUENCE MADE ON xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx 19xx AM ODD...
Page 219 235-105-210 October 1999 To return to GENBKUP: Enter Poke 120 for the messages page. Operate the CMD key; (causing a NG response) The GENBKUP screen is not refreshed until a technician input is requested. Then continue with GENBKUP normally. Note 3: f GENBKUP gets hung, the technician can force an abort by entering GENBKUP from another terminal and following the instructions on the screen that can force the first terminal process to abort.
Page 220 235-105-210 October 1999 Which software backup disk is to be updated? 14) MHD 14 1 ) MHD 1 q) To Quit Please enter 14, 1 , or q: 6.21.2.1 Select Disk Backup Decide to which disk (either MHD14 or MHD15) is to be written. Normally the oldest copy should be chosen when a new copy is made.
Page 221 235-105-210 October 1999 AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/usrbin" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 2 of x PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/DBprims.out" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/RC_OKPlib" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/rckp" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/DTlib" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/SIlib" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/CClib" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/smkp" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/mskp" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/cmkp" CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/okp" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 3 of x PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION...
Page 222 235-105-210 October 1999 Note: The following three screens are not displayed if the restart option is used. GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 1 PROCESSING - ## ROOT TO BACKUP ROOT PARTITION COPY WARNING: The system MHDs 0/1 will be simplexed and returned to duplex operation. OP:MHD=0:INFO OP:MHD=1:INFO VFY:MHD=0...
Page 223 235-105-210 October 1999 Note: n the next two displays, the command is displayed and executed only if the sodd-partition within the command (such as, /dev/no5soddx) exists in this office configuration. There is no technician action required to determine office configuration. GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 2...
Page 224 235-105-210 October 1999 Attach the identification label to the software backup disk that is printed on the ROP, which is similar to the following illustration. &OFC BASE CNTRL:__________________________ DATE:______________________________________ SOFTWARE RELEASE:__________________________ SOFTWARE UPDATE LEVEL:_____________________ SOFTWARE BACKUP D SK: xx nn SM ODD EX STS ON TH S D SK COMMENTS:__________________________________ Where: nn indicates that the SM ODD is on the system disk.
Page 225 235-105-210 October 1999 6.21.2.2 Perform GENBKUP Multi Volume DAT At the MCC, type and enter: t for a tape backup. From the GENBKUP PROCEDURE display, select the tape drive configuration. Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE 0) Tape Drive /dev/mt08 : SCSI DAT 1) Tape Drive /dev/mt18 : SCSI DAT PLEASE SELECT A TAPE DRIVE AS THE PRIMARY DRIVE: (if two DAT drives available the following lines will...
Page 226 235-105-210 October 1999 Volume Number Volume Name TOP TAPE AMTEXT AMODD SMTEXT SMODD1 SMODD2 SMODD3 SMODD4 SMODD SMODD6 Brand New Tape (Y/N) _____ Mount the tape on the tape drive. Enter GO AFTER the tape is mounted: f Yes, mount a write-enable tape in place, type and enter GO Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE...
Page 227 235-105-210 October 1999 APPEND TO SESS ON NUMBER: APPEND TO VOLUME NUMBER: The number of the session you will create: PLEASE ENTER SESS ON NUMBER Continue with next Step. Response on terminal: GENBKUP PROCEDURE TAPE BACKUP What is to be backed up? AM TEXT AM ODD x)* SM TEXT...
Page 228 235-105-210 October 1999 Volume completed, label printed on the ROP!! A label showing the contents of the logical volume is printed on the ROP similar to the following illustration. &OFC BASE CNTRL: ______ DATE: __________________ VER FY: NOT DONE GENER C: ___________ BWM LEVEL: __________ TAPE TYPE: SM TEXT TAPE SEQ NUMBER: 1...
Page 229 235-105-210 October 1999 DENS TY: N/A /dev/mt08 VTOC: /dev/vtoc ; MHDs 2/3 COMMENTS: f a request was made to copy from tape to tape, the following screen will be displayed; otherwise, continue to Step 12. GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 PROCESSING - 1 COPY DAT TO DAT SEQUENCE COPY:BKTAPE,SRC="/dev/mt08",DEST="/dev/mt38",SESS=1 COPY DAT TO DAT OPERATION SUCCESSFUL...
Page 230 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: number of days for every ODD backup to run. time of day in the hour and minutes (for example, 2330 = 11:30). STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. 6.21.3 Perform Manual Backup To Tape To review partition files, at the MCC type and enter: EXC:ENVI :UP OC,FN="/usr/bin/bkupchk";...
Page 231 235-105-210 October 1999 6.21.3.1 un File System Audits NOTE: f audit failures occur, seek technical assistance before continuing. Access MCC Page 120 At the MCC, type and enter: AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/root"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/root"; AUD {FSBLK | FSLINK} 1 /dev/root COMPLETED Response: O S FOUND O S CO ECTED At the MCC, type and enter:...
Page 232 235-105-210 October 1999 O S FOUND O S CO ECTED At the MCC, type and enter: AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/unixa"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/unixa"; Response: AUD {FSBLK | FSLINK} 1 /dev/unixa COMPLETED O S FOUND O S CO ECTED At the MCC, type and enter: AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/smtext"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/smtext";...
Page 233 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/pldmon"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/klmon"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/aim"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/bdf"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/fda"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/cdn"; Response: CMP E DISK AND CO E A E EQUAL FO /prc/... CMP DISK CO E COMPLETED At the MCC, type and enter: CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/bootfiles/pcpaud.g";...
Page 234 235-105-210 October 1999 Usable is YES At the MCC, type and enter: OP:MHD=1:INFO; Status is ACT Response: Usable is YES At the MCC, type and enter: VFY:MHD=a; Where: 0 or 1 VFY MHD x STA TED Response: VFY MHD x IN P OG ESS (every 2 minutes) VFY MHD x COMPLETED Where: MHDs being verified.
Page 235 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: BKUP ODD IN P OG ESS BKUP ODD [FULL] AM COMPLETED BKUP ODD N ODD=a COMPLETED . . . BKUP ODD N ODD=z COMPLETED BKUP ODD CMP= 0 COMPLETED BKUP ODD [FULL] ODD COMPLETED BKUP ODD COMPLETED At the MCC, type and enter: DUMP:FILE:ALL,FN="/no5text/rcv/aimrc";...
Page 236 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: EXC ENVI UP OC COMPLETED smtext rt 1 21 xxxxx no5sodd1 rt 1 39 xxxxx no5sodd2 rt 2 39 xxxxx no5codd1 rt y 40 xxxxx . . . no5sodd5: not found no5sodd6: not found Perform this step for each SM ODD partition that exists in the previous step (that is, does not have ``not found'' after the partition name).
Page 237 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: INIT:MHD=14:VFYxxxx; Where: xxxx = new, if disk drive is 340 MB. Response: INIT MHD 14 IN P OG ESS INIT MHD 14 COMPLETED Did the INIT complete normally? f YES, continue to next Step. f NO, then seek technical assistance At the MCC, type and enter: VFY:MHD=a;...
Page 238 235-105-210 October 1999 COPY:SPDISK:S C="/no5text/bkup/prmdsk.ptn",DEST="/no5text/bkup/bkdsk2.ptn"; esponse: MV MHD1 TASK X MSG STA TED MV MHD1 COMPLETED COPY SPDISK COPIED xxxx BLOCKS (printed several times) COPY SPDISK COMPLETED ST MHD1 TASK X MSG STA TED ST MHD1 IN P OG ESS Did the disk copy complete normally? f YES, continue to next Step.
Page 239 235-105-210 October 1999 MHDs being verified. At the MCC, type and enter: CMP :MHD=0, O; Note: Do not proceed unless the MHDs verify and compare. At the MCC, type and enter: COPY:ACTDISK:MHD=15,S C="/dev/vtoc",PTN="/dev/vtocb2"; esponse: COPY ACTDISK ON MHD 15 COMPLETED Did the disk copy complete normally? f YES, continue to next Step.
Page 240 235-105-210 October 1999 5ex(x)xx.xx 5ex(x)xx.xx BWMnn-nnnn /no5text 5ex(x)xx.xx BWMnn-nnnn /no5text/im 5ex(x)xx.xx BWMnn-nnnn Attach the identification label to the software backup disk that is similar to the following illustration. &OFC BASE CNT L:______________________ DATE:___________________________________ SOFTWA E ELEASE:_______________________ SOFTWA E UPDATE LEVEL:_________________ SOFTWA E BACKUP DISK: xx nn SM ODD EXISTS ON THIS DISK COMMENTS:_______________________________...
Page 241 235-105-210 October 1999 DENSITY:_______________________________ VTOC:___________; MHDs_________________ COMMENTS:______________________________ f the output message is: COPY BKDISK DISMOUNT SOFTWA E ELEASE TAPE LABEL AND MOUNT NEXT TAPE, mount next SM Text write-enable tape and continue tape write operation. At the MCC, type and enter: COPY:BKDISK,ACK:TPSIZE=2300(60M for DAT); esponse: Same as previous COPY:BKDISK:STA T response.
Page 242 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: 1, if no5sodd1 exists. 2, if no5sodd1 is not found. Select the first SM ODD partition that exists in the previous step (that is, does not have ``not found'' after the partition name). At the MCC, type and enter either (a) or (b): (a) For Single Volume Tape format (the correct tape density must be identified): COPY:BKDISK:STA T:S C="/dev/vtocx",TD="/dev/mtxx", FN="/no5text/bkup/ppppp.ptn",TPSIZE=2300(60M for DAT)zzzz;...
Page 243 235-105-210 October 1999 COPY BKDISK DISMOUNT TAPE LABEL AND MOUNT NEXT TAPE After tape rewinds, unmount, remove write-enable capability, and label tape with the following information: &OFC BASE CNT L:___________________ DATE:_______________________________ VE IFY:_____________________________ SOFTWA E ELEASE:___________________ SOFTWA E UPDATE LEVEL:_____________ TAPE TYPE:__________________________ TAPE SEQ NUMBE :___________________ DENSITY:____________________________...
Page 244 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, continue to next Step. f NO, then seek technical assistance. 6.21.3.10 estore Controls To restore REX scheduling, at the MCC type and enter: ALW:DMQ:S C= EX; From automatic backup schedule information obtained in Section 6.21.1 , Step 6, type and enter: BKUP:ODD:EVE Y=a,AT=b;...
Page 245 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.22: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 246 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.23: MAKE FULL OFFICE BACKUP TAPE 5E10 and LATE OVE VIEW This procedure allows the technician to Make Full Office Backup tapes of the text and/or office dependent data (ODD). The full office tape backup procedure saves a copy of the office software [text, ODD, and equipment configuration data (ECD) databases] from disk to tape.
Page 247 235-105-210 October 1999 Run tape drive operational diagnostics. Determine present ODD Backup schedule and clear that schedule. nhibit routine exercise (REX). Stop any active or scheduled REX diagnostics. Clear all active and scheduled office backups. Activate any /no5text or /smtext software updates in the soak state. Activate any ECD/SG recent changes that have not been activated.
Page 248 235-105-210 October 1999 Table 6.23-1 Tape Backup Procedures PROCEDURE ACT V TY REMARKS (Tape Drive Configuration) Preconditioning Required for all tape update procedures. 6.23.1 nitialize GENBKUP Make specific procedure selection process here. 6.23.2 This procedure is selected only if office is equipped with a 3B21D GENBKUP Multi Volume DAT processor and there is a SCS DAT drive cartridge and office is on...
Page 249 235-105-210 October 1999 Caution: On MCC Page 123, MHD0 and MHD1 must be duplex and all other MHDs should be duplex before starting this procedure. The switch must NOT be in an OVERLOAD STATE (Page 109). t is desirable, but not mandatory, that the control units (CU), all switching modules (SM), and all remote switching modules (RSM) be duplex.
Page 250 235-105-210 October 1999 ABO TED indicates no temporary updates in the switch and UPD US E 1 is printed at ROP. Which response did you get: a), b), or c)? f a), continue to next Step. f b) or c), go to Step Make all temporary software updates OFF C AL or back them out.
Page 251 Procedure 6.23.7 . 6.23.2 Initialize GENBKUP Caution: This procedure could abort if the 5ESS-2000 switch contains a software update in the temporary state. This would be due to differences between the incore version and the disk version created by a temporary software update.
Page 252 235-105-210 October 1999 TAPE MADE ON xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx 19xx OFTWR BKUP DI K 14 UPDATED ON xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx 19xx OFTWR BKUP DI K 15 UPDATED ON xxx xxx xx xx:xx:xx 19xx Please enter 'go' <to continue> or 'q' <to quit>: At the MCC, type and enter: GO Response on terminal: GENBKUP PROCEDURE...
Page 253 235-105-210 October 1999 are listed in 235-600-750,Output Message Manual ( CV:MENU-GENBKUP). Note: Update and verify disks (u) insures disk data integrity before doing office backup. Update and verify the disks? f YES, go to Procedure 6.23.6 f NO, continue to next Step. At the MCC, type and enter: t (for a tape backup) rt (for restart of tape backup).
Page 254 235-105-210 October 1999 6.23.3 GENBKUP Multi Volume DAT From the GENBKUP PROCEDURE display, select the tape drive configuration. Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE 0) Tape Drive /dev/mt08 : C I DAT 1) Tape Drive /dev/mt18 : C I DAT PLEA E ELECT A TAPE DRIVE A THE PRIMARY DRIVE: From terminal display, select "Two DAT AUTO TRANSFER"...
Page 255 235-105-210 October 1999 MODD6 Terminal Response: Brand New Tape (Y/N) _____ Mount the tape on the tape drive. Enter GO AFTER the tape is mounted: GENBKUP PROCEDURE TAPE BACKUP Please specify DAT position for GENBKUP? Beginning of the DAT Append to the end of DAT eek to specific position of the DAT To quit PLEA E ENTER ONE OF THE ABOVE OPTION :...
Page 256 235-105-210 October 1999 The number of the session you will create: PLEASE ENTER SESS ON NUMBER: Continue with next Step. Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE TAPE DRIVE What is to be backed up? AM TEXT M TEXT AM ODD M ODD No More election PLEA E ENTER ONE OF THE ABOVE OPTION :...
Page 257 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Label with contents of the logical volume is printed on the ROP, which is similar to the following illustration. Table 6.23-2 OFC BASE & CNT L: ______ DATE: 08:48 ____________ VE IFY: NOT DONE GENE IC: ___________ BWM LEVEL: __________ TAPE TYPE: TOP TAPE - COMMON TAPE SEQ NUMBE : 1...
Page 258 235-105-210 October 1999 CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/DBprims.out" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/DTlib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/ Ilib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/CClib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/smkp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/mskp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/cmkp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/okp" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 4 OF x PROCE ING - 1 CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/pcpaud" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/3bpmgr" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/inhadm" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/simprc" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/dkdrv" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/fmprc"...
Page 259 235-105-210 October 1999 VERIFYING TATU OF MHD 0/1 MHD 0/1 ARE DUPLEXED. PROCEEDING ... VFY:MHD=0 VFY:MHD=1 COPY:PTN:ALL, RC="/no5text/bkup/prim.ptn",DE T="/no5text/bkup/bkup.ptn",ACT NOTE: f both AMTEXT and AMODD are selected then the following display and its label will be displayed after ODD backup display. GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 OF 1...
Page 260 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP:ODD ALW:RC The ODD BACKUP section of GENBKUP has successfully completed! GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 OF 1 PROCE ING - 24 AUD:F BLK=2,IN ="/dev/no5aodd1" AUD:F LINK=2,IN ="/dev/no5aodd1" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 OF 1 PROCE ING - 4 AM ODD EQUENCE COPY:BKDI K:MULTI, RC="/dev/vtoc",TD="/dev/mt08",...
Page 261 235-105-210 October 1999 f SMTEXT selected: GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 OF 1 PROCE ING - 1 AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/smtext" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/smtext" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/unixabf" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/unixabf" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 OF 1 PROCE ING - 4 M TEXT EQUENCE COPY:BKDI K:MULTI, RC="/dev/vtoc1",TD="/dev/mt08", FN="/no5text/bkup/smtext.ptn",P E...
Page 262 235-105-210 October 1999 PROCE ING - 1 AUD:F BLK=3,IN ="/dev/no5codd1" AUD:F LINK=3,IN ="/dev/no5codd1" AUD:F BLK=3,IN ="/dev/no5sodd1" AUD:F LINK=3,IN ="/dev/no5sodd1" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 OF 1 PROCE ING - 3 M ODD - NO5 ODD1 EQUENCE COPY:BKDI K:MULTI, RC="/dev/vtoc1",TD="/dev/mt08", FN="/no5text/bkup/sodd1.ptn",P E =1,PVOL=3, E =1,VOL=4,EXT, KP,NODMTM G...
Page 263 235-105-210 October 1999 COPY DAT-TO-DAT OPERATION UCCE FUL! Completed session, screen will display: GENBKUP PROCEDURE MAIN MENU ELECT OPTION: Backup to Tape Physical Tape Verification Check LDFT Tape Header oftware Disk Backup Update and Verify Disks Verify Disk Data rt) Restart Tape equence rd) Restart ftw Bkup Disk...
Page 264 235-105-210 October 1999 To make a TOP TAPE, at the MCC, type and enter: t Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE MAKE A TOP TAPE A LOW DEN ITY top tape will be made so any office on this generic can use it. Mount a tape with a write ring: EN URE MTC 0 &...
Page 265 235-105-210 October 1999 GENBKUP PROCEDURE TAPE BACKUP What is to be backed up? g) AM TEXT M TEXT a) AM ODD M ODD t) TOP TAPE q) To Quit Please enter g, x, a, s, t, or q: Note: This process makes backup tapes of Text (AM and SM) and/or ODD (AM and SM). Are only ODD backup tapes to be made at this time? f YES, go to 6.23.4.3 .
Page 266 235-105-210 October 1999 AUD:NIDATA4 AUD:NIDATA5 AUD:NIDATA8 AUD:NIDATA9 GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 3 of x PROCE ING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/DBprims.out" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/RC_OKPlib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/rckp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/DTlib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/ Ilib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/CClib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/smkp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/mskp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/cmkp" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/no5text/prc/okp" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 4 of x PROCE...
Page 267 235-105-210 October 1999 GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 6 of x PROCE ING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION VFY:FILE,FLI T="/no5text/bkup/CRCfile" NOTE: The next three screens are not displayed if the restart option is used. GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 1 PROCE ING - ## ROOT TO BACKUP ROOT PARTITION COPY WARNING: The system MHDs 0/1 will be simplexed and returned to duplex operation.
Page 268 235-105-210 October 1999 GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 2 of 2 PROCE ING - ## ODD BACKUP ALW-RC Option 1 (Or) NO-RC Option 2 BKUP:ODD [Printed and executed if Option 1] INH:RC BKUP:ODD BKUP:ODD,AM [May not be printed and executed] ALW:RC Normal Response on terminal: GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 1 PROCE...
Page 269 235-105-210 October 1999 COPY:BKDI K,ACK:TP IZE=2300 yyy = Where: NO MAL: HIGH (xx = 00) WA NING: LOW (xx = 08) NO MAL: LOW (xx = 08, not equipped with high-density drive) GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 1 PROCE ING - ## AM TEXT EQUENCE yyy DEN ITY TAPE...
Page 270 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: GO Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE TAPE BACKUP What is to be backed up? g) AM TEXT M TEXT a) AM ODD M ODD t) TOP TAPE q) To Quit Please enter g, x, a, s, t, or q: To make the SM Text backup tape, at the MCC, type and enter: x Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE...
Page 271 235-105-210 October 1999 To automatically verify tapes, at the MCC, type and enter Note: The messageCOPY BKDISK DISMOUNT . . . TAPE LABEL AND MOUNT NEXT TAPE may be output on the ROP. With the verify tape option selected in the previous step, DO NOT remove the tape until the verify is completed as indicated on the screen of the terminal.
Page 272 235-105-210 October 1999 OFC BASE & CNT L:______________ DATE:__________________________ VE IFY:_zzz____________________ SOFTWA E ELEASE:______________ SOFTWA E UPDATE LEVEL:_________ TAPE TYPE: SM TEXT TAPE SEQ NUMBE :_______________ DENSITY:_______________________ VTOC:_______; MHDs_____________ COMMENTS:______________________ Where: zzz = SUCCESSFUL, if automatic tape verification was successful. NOT DONE, if tape was NOT verified automatically.
Page 273 235-105-210 October 1999 OPTION 1: Inhibit Recent Change for the shortest amount of time possible. However, the total time for this procedure is increased. OPTION 2: Allow the time for this procedure to be as short as possible. However, the time Recent Change is inhibited is greater than option 1. Please enter 1 (option 1), 2 (option 2), or q (quit): f YES, continue to next Step.
Page 274 235-105-210 October 1999 After mounting write enabled tape type and enter GO Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE AM ODD EQUENCE WARNING: Tapes MU T be at least 2300 feet long (60M for DAT). hould tape verification be done AUTOMATICALLY after each tape is made ?? Please enter y <yes>, n <no>, or q <quit>: To automatically verify tapes, at the MCC, type and enter: y Note: The messageCOPY BKDISK DISMOUNT .
Page 275 235-105-210 October 1999 Please UNMOUNT the tape and MOUNT another tape onto the tape drive. Enter GO to continue: Where: yyy = NO MAL: HIGH (xx = 00) WA NING: LOW (xx = 08) NO MAL: LOW (xx = 08, not equipped with high-density drive) Remove the tape from the tape drive and attach the identification label to the tape that is printed on the ROP, which is similar to the following illustration.
Page 276 235-105-210 October 1999 To make the SM ODD backup tapes for all disks, at the MCC, type and enter: s Note: n the next three displays, the command is displayed and executed only if the sodd partition within the command (such as /dev/no5soddx) exists in this office configuration. There is no technician action required to determine office configuration.
Page 277 235-105-210 October 1999 To continue, type and enter the appropriate rt number Terminal Response: GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 1 PROCE ING - ## M ODD - NO5 ODDx EQUENCE WARNING: Tapes MU T be at least 2300 feet long (60M for DAT). MOUNT tape on Tape Drive.
Page 278 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: yyy = NO MAL: HIGH (xx = 00) WA NING: LOW (xx = 08) NO MAL: LOW (xx = 08, not equipped with high-density drive) ppppp.ptn value is shown in the following illustration: PA TITIONS /dev/vtocx /ppppp.ptn no5sodd1 /dev/vtoc1/sodd1.ptn...
Page 279 235-105-210 October 1999 VTOC:_______; MHDs_____________ COMMENTS:______________________ Where: zzz = SUCCESSFUL, if automatic tape verification was successful. NOT DONE, if tape was NOT verified automatically. NOT SUCCESSFUL, if automatic tape verification failed. f the output message is Please UNMOUNT the tape and MOUNT another tape: To continue tape write operation, mount next SM ODD write enabled tape, and type and enter GO For Restart sequences, enter next ``rt'' number.
Page 280 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify Disk Data rt) Restart Tape equence rd) Restart ftw Bkup Disk Copy DAT to DAT To Quit PLEA E ENTER ONE OF THE ABOVE OPTION : Note: f you choose not to automatically verify tapes, the tapes should be verified now using the p option. The tape label should be modified to indicate successful verification when the tapes verify successfully.
Page 281 235-105-210 October 1999 PROCE ING - ## ODD BACKUP The ODD Backup Procedure has two options: OPTION 1: Inhibit Recent Change for the shortest amount of time possible. However, the total time for this procedure is increased. OPTION 2: Allow the time for this procedure to be as short as possible. However, the time Recent Change is inhibited is greater than option 1.
Page 282 235-105-210 October 1999 AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/root" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/etc" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/etc" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/db" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/db" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/unixa" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/unixa" AUD:F BLK=2,IN ="/dev/no5text" AUD:F LINK=2,IN ="/dev/no5text" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/cft" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/cft" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/dg" AUD:F LINK=1,IN ="/dev/dg" AUD:F BLK=1,IN ="/dev/usrbin"...
Page 283 235-105-210 October 1999 CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/simprc" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/dkdrv" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/fmprc" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/eih" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/prc/pldmon" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/prc/klmon" GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 5 of x PROCE ING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/prc/aim" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/prc/bdf" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/prc/fda" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/prc/cdn" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/illalib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/llalib" CMPR:DI K:CORE,FN="/klib"...
Page 284 235-105-210 October 1999 command (such as /dev/no5soddx) exists in this office configuration. There is no technician action required to determine office configuration. GENBKUP PROCEDURE PAGE 1 of 2 PROCE ING - ## M ODD VERIFICATION AUD:F BLK=3,IN ="/dev/no5codd1" AUD:F LINK=3,IN ="/dev/no5codd1" AUD:F BLK=3,IN ="/dev/no5sodd1"...
Page 285 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, then seek technical assistance. s a "back up to tape" procedure required? f YES, go to Procedure 6.23.2 and perform Steps 4 and 5. Return to the following Step 6. f NO, continue with next Step. To exit the procedure, at the MCC, type and enter: q To restore REX scheduling, at the MCC, type and enter: ALW:DMQ:S C= EX;...
Page 286 235-105-210 October 1999 Did the previous step complete successfully? f YES, continue to next Step. f NO, then STOP. DO NOT CONTINUE. Seek technical assistance. At the MCC, type and enter: OP:STATUS:FILESYS; OP STATUS FILESYS STA TED Response: /no5text on /dev/no5text read/write on ..
Page 287 235-105-210 October 1999 Access MCC Page 120 At the MCC, type and enter: AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/root"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/root"; AUD {FSBLK | FSLINK} 1 /dev/root COMPLETED Response: O S FOUND O S CO ECTED At the MCC, type and enter: AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/etc"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/etc"; AUD {FSBLK | FSLINK} 1 /dev/etc COMPLETED Response: O S FOUND O S CO...
Page 288 235-105-210 October 1999 AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/unixa"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/unixa"; AUD {FSBLK | FSLINK} 1 /dev/unixa COMPLETED Response: O S FOUND O S CO ECTED At the MCC, type and enter: AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/smtext"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/smtext"; AUD:FSBLK=1,INS="/dev/unixabf"; AUD:FSLINK=1,INS="/dev/unixabf"; AUD {FSBLK | FSLINK} 1 /dev/... COMPLETED Response: O S FOUND O S CO ECTED 6.23.7.2...
Page 289 235-105-210 October 1999 CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/bdf"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/fda"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/prc/cdn"; CMP E Response: DISK AND CO E A E EQUAL FO /prc/... CMP DISK CO E COMPLETED At the MCC, type and enter: CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/bootfiles/pcpaud.g"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/bootfiles/3bpmgr"; CMP :DISK:CO E,FN="/bootfiles/inhadm";...
Page 290 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: VFY:MHD=0; VFY:MHD=1; Where: x = MHDs just installed. VFY MHD x STA TED Response: VFY MHD x IN P OG ESS (every 2 minutes) VFY MHD x COMPLETED At the MCC, type and enter: CMP :MHD=0, O; esponse: PF = P INTOUT FOLLOWS.
Page 291 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP ODD SM=z COMPLETED BKUP ODD [FULL] AM COMPLETED BKUP ODD N ODD=a COMPLETED . . . BKUP ODD N ODD=z COMPLETED BKUP ODD CMP= 0 COMPLETED BKUP ODD [FULL] ODD=xx COMPLETED BKUP ODD COMPLETED At the MCC, type and enter: DUMP:FILE:ALL,FN="/no5text/rcv/aimrc"; DUMP FILE ALL COMPLETED Response: /etc/mount /dev/no5aoddx /no5odd/cpdata...
Page 292 235-105-210 October 1999 To determine what SM ODD partitions exist on the switch, at the MCC, type and enter: EXC:ENVI :UP OC,FN="/etc/parchk", A GS="/no5text/bkup/parchk.list"; Response: EXC ENVI UP OC COMPLETED smtext rt 1 21 xxxxx no5sodd1 rt 1 39 xxxxx no5sodd2 rt 2 39 xxxxx no5codd1 rt y 40 xxxxx .
Page 293 235-105-210 October 1999 VOL=1; COPY BKDISK IN P OG ESS Response: COPY BKDISK COMPLETED. DISMOUNT TAPE AND LABEL COPY BKDISK DISMOUNT TAPE LABEL AND MOUNT NEXT TAPE Obtain software update levels of no5text and smtext partitions for the tape label to be created by the next steps.
Page 294 235-105-210 October 1999 (b) For Multi Volume Tape format: VFY:TAPE,TD="/dev/mt08": ET Y=3,SESS=x,VOL=1:; VFY TAPE STA TED Response: VFY TAPE COMPLETED ET IES 0 HEADE MISMATCHES 0 DATA MISMATCHES 0 Did the verify complete successfully? f YES, continue to next Step. f NO, then seek technical assistance.
Page 295 235-105-210 October 1999 OFC BASE & CNT L:______________ DATE:__________________________ VE IFY:________________________ SOFTWA E ELEASE:______________ SOFTWA E UPDATE LEVEL:_________ TAPE TYPE:_____________________ TAPE SEQ NUMBE :_______________ DENSITY:_______________________ VTOC:_______; MHDs_____________ COMMENTS:______________________ f the output message is: COPY BKDISK DISMOUNT TAPE LABEL AND MOUNT NEXT TAPE: Mount the next AM ODD tape with a write-enable ring in place and continue tape write operation.
Page 296 235-105-210 October 1999 COPY:BKDISK:STA T:S C="/dev/vtoc1",TD="/dev/mtxx", FN="/no5text/bkup/smtext.ptn",TPSIZE=2300(60M for DAT)zzzz; Where: /dev/mtxx /dev/mt00 (6250 bpi) for KEYSTONE III tape drives (KS23113, List 14). /dev/mtxx= /dev/mt08 for all other tape drives. zzzz = ,EXT if TD is /dev/mt00. zzzz does not exist if TD is /dev/mt08. (b) For Multi Volume Tape format: COPY:BKDISK:MULTI,S C="/dev/vtoc1",TD="/dev/mt08", FN="/no5text/bkup/smtext.ptn",PSESS=u,PVOL=v,SESS=x,...
Page 297 235-105-210 October 1999 xx = 00 or 08 from Step Where: (b) For Multi Volume Tape format: VFY:TAPE,TD="/dev/mt08": ET Y=3,SESS=x,VOL=3:; Response: VFY TAPE STA TED VFY TAPE COMPLETED ET IES 0 HEADE MISMATCHES 0 DATA MISMATCHES 0 Did the verify complete successfully? f YES, continue to next Step.
Page 298 235-105-210 October 1999 /dev/mtxx = /dev/mt08 for all other tape drives. zzzz = ,EXT if TD is /dev/mt00. zzzz does not exist if TD is /dev/mt08. vtocx = See Table 6.23-3 . ppppp.ptn = See Table 6.23-3 . (b) For Multi Volume Tape format: COPY:BKDISK:MULTI,S C="/dev/vtocx",TD="/dev/mt08", FN="/no5text/bkup/ppppp.ptn",PSESS=u,PVOL=v,SESS=x, VOL=yy,EXT,SKP,NODMTMSG;...
Page 299 235-105-210 October 1999 Mount next SM ODD write enabled tape and continue tape write operation. At the MCC, type and enter: COPY:BKDISK,ACK:TPSIZE=2300(60M for DAT); Same as previous COPY:BKDISK:STA T response. Response: Note: All SM ODD partitions must be copied during the same backup session. Are there more SM ODD partitions to be copied to backup tapes? f YES, select the next SM ODD partition, mount next SM ODD write enabled backup tape, and repeat from Step 4.
Page 300 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 55...
Page 301 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.24: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 302 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.25: SM ODD MEMO Y G OWTH (5E9.2 AND LATE ) OVE VIEW A. Office Dependent Data (ODD) SM Memory Growths CAUTION: Since the growth of ODD is not reversible, extreme caution should be taken before executing ANY ODD growth.
Page 303 235-105-210 October 1999 applicable. To perform an UODD growth, perform Steps 4 through 8. NOTE: n the software releases of 5E9.2 and later, the UODD size is directly determined by the number of peripherals and customers on the module. UODD growth is a normal part of growing a new module. This was not the case for prior software releases.
Page 304 235-105-210 October 1999 alarm will be issued. When the percent used protected ODD reaches 95%, a major alarm is issued. Changing DBmavsodd will set the lower bound at which a minor alarm will be output to the receive-only printer (ROP). Having the NRODD to be less than 80 percent full is seen as a good approximation of the amount of available memory needed for recent change transaction workspace.
Page 305 235-105-210 October 1999 switching module (RSM) will result in a corresponding reduction in the number of Kbytes allocated to SAB memory. Reducing the SAB memory allocation will result in the RSM being able to store billing information for a smaller period of time if the RSM should be forced into a stand-alone mode.
Page 306 235-105-210 October 1999 event that the NRODD growth aborts abnormally. To backup the NRODD and RODD type and enter BKUP:ODD,N ODD=a, ODD; a = SM number Where: BKUP ODD N ODD=a IN P OG ESS Response: BKUP ODD N ODD=a COMPLETED BKUP ODD ODD IN P OG ESS BKUP ODD ODD COMPLETED BKUP ODD COMPLETED...
Page 307 235-105-210 October 1999 memory board growths or reduction of SAB memory. The RODD growth requires that every SM has sufficient memory to increase the RODD by the amount of Kbytes specified in the input message. NOTE 2: The recommended size of the RODD, after a RODD growth, should leave the RODD with no more than 70 percent RODD used memory or less than 256 Kbytes available RODD.
Page 308 235-105-210 October 1999 Before executing the next step, observe the following warning. CAUTION: The next step causes the RODD in EVERY SM to be permanently grown by the input number of kilobytes. There is no subsequent way to reverse the RODD growth without using the magnetic tape stored versions of the ODDs.
Page 309 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.26: VE IFY SOFTWA E BACKUP DISK OVE VIEW ® WA NING: This procedure could abort if the ESS -2000 switch contains a software update in the temporary state. This would be due to differences between the incore version and the disk version created by a temporary software update.
Page 310 235-105-210 October 1999 VFYTXT PROCEDURE MAIN MENU WARNING: BWMs in a TEMPORARY state can cause a CMPR:DISK:CORE failure, aborting VFYTXT Verify Generic Text Tape Verify Software Disk Backup To Quit PLEASE ENTER ONE OF THE ABOVE OPTIONS: Enter d from previous screen. Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE...
Page 311 235-105-210 October 1999 RMV:MHD=x; x = The selected backup disk to be verified. Where: NOTE: The following is the verification part of the procedure. No user input is needed until the verification is complete. f the verification fails for any reason, this could be a very C ITICAL P OBLEM and must be resolved immediately.
Page 312 235-105-210 October 1999 Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE PAGE 3 of PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/eih" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/prc/pldmon" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/prc/klmon" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/prc/aim" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/prc/bdf" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/prc/fda" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/prc/cdn" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/illalib" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE PAGE 4 of PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION...
Page 313 235-105-210 October 1999 Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE MAIN MENU WARNING: BWMs in a TEMPORARY state can cause a CMPR:DISK:CORE failure, aborting VFYTXT Verify Generic Text Tape Verify Software Disk Backup To Quit PLEASE ENTER ONE OF THE ABOVE OPTIONS: Enter q from previous screen.
Page 314 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.27: VE IFY BACKUP AM TEXT TAPES OVE VIEW ® WA NING: This procedure could abort if the ESS -2000 switch contains a software update in the temporary state. This would be due to differences between the incore version and the disk version created by a temporary software update.
Page 315 235-105-210 October 1999 type and enter on RC/V terminal: CV:MENU:VFYTXT; Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE MAIN MENU WARNING: BWMs in a TEMPORARY state can cause a CMPR:DISK:CORE failure, aborting VFYTXT Verify Generic Text Tape Verify Software Disk Backup To Quit PLEASE ENTER ONE OF THE ABOVE OPTIONS: Type and enter: t from previous screen.
Page 316 235-105-210 October 1999 VFYTXT PROCEDURE GENERIC BACKUP TEXT VERIFICATION Please mount the text backup tape to be verified. After mounting the text backup tape, verify that the tape drive is on-line. Please enter the tape device to be used. a) /dev/mt00 b) /dev/mt08 c) /dev/mt10 d) /dev/mt18...
Page 317 235-105-210 October 1999 CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/rckp" OPTNM="/dev/no text",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/CClib" OPTNM="/dev/no text",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/smkp" OPTNM="/dev/no text",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/mskp" OPTNM="/dev/no text",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/cmkp" OPTNM="/dev/no text",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/no text/prc/okp" OPTNM="/dev/no text",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE PAGE 2 of PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/bootfiles/pcpaud.g"...
Page 318 235-105-210 October 1999 OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE PAGE 4 of PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/llalib" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/klib" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/ecdlib" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; CMPR:DISK:CORE,FN="/pllib" OPTNM="/dev/broot",MPT="/tmp/siv",MHDNUM=x; Response on terminal: VFYTXT PROCEDURE PAGE PROCESSING - ## AM TEXT VERIFICATION VFY:FILE,FLIST="/no text/bkup/rootVFY",DN=x,PN= ,MP="/tmp/siv" VFY:FILE,FLIST="/no text/bkup/no textVFY",DN=x,PN=19,MP="/tmp/siv",olmp="/no tex t"...
Page 319 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.28: G OW AM ODD MEMO Y 5E9(2) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure should be used to increase the size of the administrative module (AM) office dependent data (ODD). t includes growing the protected application segment (PAS) as well as the AM ODD disk space. P OCEDU E CAUTION 1: This procedure S NOT to be used for AM memory growth that is being performed for Software Release Retrofit purposes.
Page 320 235-105-210 October 1999 5. echo_file <cr> 6. sysgen: 7. flat_database: 8. hlmode: 9. default_dir: <cr> Enter Execute... _____________________________________________________ Enter Form Name: trbegin 1. tr_name:TRBEGIN <cr> Enter Execute... _____________________________________________________ Enter Form Name: btparm Enter Data Base Operation _____________________________________________________ 1. btparm name BTPARM Enter Update Change field...
Page 321 235-105-210 October 1999 ST ODDG W AM COMPLETED Response: On EA page, to clear all EA page controls and set CU=0 and primary disk MHD=0 prior to the 54 command, enter the following commands: CAUTION: The following step involves a manual, level 4 initialization for the AM. Call processing will be affected for approximately 1 minute, 12 seconds.
Page 322 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: COPY PTN ALL COMPLETED xxx BLOCKS COPIED To preserve memory growth, backup the AM ODD, at the MCC or STLWS, type and enter: BKUP:ODD,AM; Response: BKUP ODD FULL AM COMPLETED BKUP ODD COMPLETED STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright ©...
Page 323 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.29: BACK OUT LAST OFFICIAL SOFTWA E UPDATE(S) P OCEDU E This procedure should not be performed if any recent change activities are in progress. Verification of recent change activity should be done before continuing. To verify that no recent change processes are being run, at the MCC type and enter OP: CUSE ;...
Page 324 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.30: MANUAL STOP AND STA T OF SOFTWA E UPDATE EXPANSION OVE VIEW For 5E9 and later software releases, software updates will be sent out (through SCANS or CSCANS) in a compressed format. Normally, with no manual intervention, software update expansion will occur automatically. f automatic software update expansion is not wanted, automatic expansion may be stopped and then manually restarted by following this procedure.
Page 325 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.31: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 326 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.32: PE FO M SM OFF-LINE PUMP P OCEDU E Refer to Off-Line Boot Procedure in System Recovery 235-105-250. Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 327  To fully utilize the new memory, a level 52 of the AM is required. This will result in a 1- to 2-minutes of AM/CN downtime.  f the memory growth is being performed for a Software Retrofit, Lucent Technologies recommends that the system boot to utilize the memory be performed during the retrofit procedure and NOT during this procedure. P OCEDU E 6.33.1 Verify Memory Page Size...
Page 328 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Forms selection page is displayed. To review btparm form, type and enter btparm esponse: Cursor at btparmname key field. Type and enter btparm esponse: btparm form is displayed and populated. Record the value of field 7 (pages). Type and enter <...
Page 329 235-105-210 October 1999 Once completed, then a boot of the data base is performed. To access the ECD form rcvparams; at RC/V or supplementary trunk and line work station (STLWS) terminal, type and enter: CV:MENU: CVECD; esponse: rcvparams form is displayed. Cursor at database_name field. Type and enter following values: Field No.
Page 330 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Forms selection form is displayed. To end transaction, type and enter trend esponse: Transaction End form is displayed. Cursor at tr_name field. Depress ETU N four times to default all four fields on trend form. Type and enter e esponse: At top right of screen, updating .
Page 331 235-105-210 October 1999 To bring up form, type and enter ucb esponse: UCB form is displayed. To update form, type and enter u esponse: Blank ucb form is displayed. Type and enter values for the following key fields: Field No. Name Value k_complex_name...
Page 332 235-105-210 October 1999 0x1f 0x1f 0x1f a 0x3f 0x3f 0x3f a 0x7f a 0x7f 0x7f 0xff a 0xff 0xff 0x1ff a 0x1ff b 0x1ff 0x3ff a 0x3ff b 0x3ff 0x7ff 0x7ff a 0x7ff b 0xfff 0xfff a 0xfff b 0x1fff 0x1fff a 0x1fff b 0x3fff...
Page 333 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: EA page CU status cleared of forced condition. Has both CU (0 and 1) memories been upgraded? f NO, continue with next Step. f YES, go to Safe Stop Point, Section 6.33.4.1 . To restore the CU to service; at the CU power switch, operate the OS/ ST key to the ST position. esponse: RST COMPLETED output message is expected.
Page 334 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, (retrofit activity), then continue with next Step. f YES, (normal office activity), seek technical assistance. Do not continue until problem is resolved. f NO, continue with next Step. Allow the system to soak according to local practices before continuing to Section 6.33.5 . Lucent Technologies recommends that the soak period not exceed 24 hours.
Page 335 235-105-210 October 1999 ALW:FILESYS:MOUNT,FN="/dev/bdb",BSDI ="/bdb"; esponse: COMPLETED output message received. At RC/V or STLWS terminal, type and enter: COPY:FILESYS:FILE,S C="/database/appecd",DEST="/bdb/appecd"; esponse: COMPLETED output message received. At RC/V or STLWS terminal, type and enter: COPY:FILESYS:CFILE,FN="/bdb/appecd"; esponse: COMPLETED output message received. At RC/V or STLWS terminal, type and enter: INH:FILESYS:UMOUNT,FN="/dev/bdb";...
Page 336 235-105-210 October 1999 To update form, type and enter u esponse: Blank ucb form is displayed. Type and enter values for the following key fields: Field No. Name Value k_complex_name k-complex_number definition k_unit_name MASC k_unit_number esponse: ucb form is displayed and populated. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter c Type and enter 22...
Page 337 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter < s this procedure being performed as part of a Software Retrofit? f YES, go to Section 6.33.9 . f NO, continue with next Step. s BTPARM form pages value large enough for intended growth? Reference: Section 6.33.1 Steps 4 through 9.
Page 338 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: All recent change activity is updated in the incore data base. To end transaction, type and enter trend esponse: Transaction End form is displayed. Cursor at tr_name field. Depress ETU N four times to default all four fields on trend form. Type and enter e esponse: At top right of screen, updating .
Page 339 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 13...
Page 340 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.34: CONVE T TN 56 CI CUIT PACKS TO TN 2012 CI CUIT PACKS P OCEDU E Access Recent Change ucb form in the update mode. Enter the following key values for the identified growth unit: complex_name: CU complex_number: 1 unit_name: MASC...
Page 341 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.35: LOAD A CA T IDGE TAPE IN A SCSI DAT D IVE (3B21D) OVE VIEW The Small Computer System nterface (SCS ) Digital Audio Tape (DAT) Drive has the following indentification and associated circuit pack: SCSI DAT D IVE CI CUIT PACK (Figure 6.35-1 ).
Page 342 235-105-210 October 1999 Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 343: Figure 6.35-2 Cassette Write Protect
235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 6.35-1 SCSI DAT Drive Circuit Pack, Front View [UN376,B (NC 006-3503341) or UN376C (NC 006-3300608)] Figure 6.35-2 Cassette Write Protect STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 3...
Page 344 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.36: EMOVE/UNMOUNT TAPE F OM SCSI 9-T ACK TAPE D IVES (3B21D) OVE VIEW CAUTION: Make sure that no tape transactions are in progress to the tape drive before starting the procedure. ® NOTE: For specific information on the ESS -2000 Switch Compact Digital Exchange (CDX), refer to 235-120-010 (Compact Digital Exchange Reference Guide) and 235-120-020 (Compact Digital Exchange User's Guide).
Page 345 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.37: EMOVE A CA T IDGE TAPE F OM A SCSI DAT D IVE (3B21D) OVE VIEW The Small Computer System nterface (SCS ) Digital Audio Tape (DAT) Drive has the following indentification and associated circuit pack, and LED unloading status: SCSI DAT D IVE CI CUIT PACK CASSETTE...
Page 346 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.38: MAKE ASM TAPE BACKUP OVE VIEW This procedure directs the technician to copy the Administrative Services Module (ASM) disk files to tape backup. The disk files can be either Lucent created files or Customer created files. The ASM backup tapes provide a reliable source for system recovery in the event that data in both system disk drives become corrupted.
Page 347 235-105-210 October 1999 ® prompt, type and enter CV:MENU:SH; At the (S)TLWS, to obtain a UNIX To bring up the ASM console link, type and enter dsmcon esponse: CONNECTED Press the ENTE key. esponse: host-name console login: _____________. Log on to ASM using a valid root login and password. esponse: host-name# DISCONNECT ...
Page 348 235-105-210 October 1999 Determine Tape Backup Duration For Lucent Created Files Total execution time for this procedure depends on three sequential activities: Synchronization of disk0 with disk1 is terminated. Data from partitions 3 through 7 of disk1 are copied to the backup tape. Disk0 and disk1 are resynchronized.
Page 349 235-105-210 October 1999 Note 1: To determine tape back up duration refer to Section 6.38.1 , Step 2. Note 2: While tape backup is running, at the MCC page 124, the ASM-0 icon is in the DG state and second line of text reads "D SK1 MA NT", because the disk mirror is intentionally broken to permit the backup.
Page 350 235-105-210 October 1999  Tape drive heads are dirty.  Poor tape quality. With the problem corrected, return to Step 1. 6.38.3 Backup Customer Created Disk Files NOTE 1: This section is provided by Lucent as an aid to the Customer in performing a backup of non-Lucent provided disk files.
Page 351 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 6.39: ESTO E ASM DISK FILES F OM CONFIGU ATION BACKUP TAPE OVE VIEW This procedure directs the technician to restore or copy the Administrative Services Module (ASM) disk files from the configuration backup tape. This is required following an unrecoverable disk file corruption. A viable operating system is required before beginning this procedure.
Page 352 235-105-210 October 1999  ASMLNK NOTE: The ASM console link allows you to log in to the ASM as the user root. Network security restrictions do not apply in this case since you are accessing the ASM over a direct AM-to-ASM link. ®...
Page 353 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: There are four possible restore configurations:  Full restore copies all files from the backup tape to the original file locations on the disk drive.  Selective restore, single file copies a single file from the backup tape to the original file location on the disk drive.
Page 354 235-105-210 October 1999 nsert backup tape cartridge from Procedure Section 6.38.3 into the ASM tape drive. Restore the root file system from tape: type and enter cpio^-icvdmul^<^/dev/rmt/0c Where ^ = space Return ASM to service: type and enter init 3 Remove the backup tape and store according to local procedures.
Page 355 235-105-210 October 1999 EMOTE OFFICE TEST LINE 7.1 GENE AL ® This section describes the functions and equipment of the remote office test line (ROTL) for the ESS -2000 switch. The ROTL is a feature that allows interoffice trunk testing automatically from a Centralized Automatic Reporting on Trunks (CAROT) system.
Page 356 235-105-210 October 1999 GDSFs can be configured to provide GDG transceiver circuits. Two TTFs can be assigned in an SM if the SM is equipped with two global digital service units (GDSUs). Thirty-two GDSFs can be assigned in an SM-2000 and one or two GDSFs are available in an SM. Any number of SMs can be equipped with TTFs or GDSFs.
Page 357 (make-busy or restore trunk) is passed to the software controlling trunk status Lucent Technologies 3B20D/21D computer memory. When the trunk status has been updated, a message is returned to the ROTL and a message is printed in ®...
Page 358 235-105-210 October 1999 The number of trunks in the group out of service at or above the automatic maintenance limit. 120- PM Low Tone Priming information error. Test Progress ndividual Trunk - Tone-2225 Hz Trunk in service. Test Progress Trunk Group - Tone-2225 Hz All trunks in group in service.
Page 359 235-105-210 October 1999 Copyright © 1999 Page 5...
Page 360 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 7-1 5ESS -2000 Switch OTL Application Figure 7-2 OTL Priming Information 7.4.2 EMOTE OFFICE ESPONDE TESTING 7.4.2.1 Transmission Tests (100-Type Test Line) This test is a 1-way (far-to-near) loss and/or noise transmission test to a 100-type test line in the far-end office. The Copyright ©...
Page 361 235-105-210 October 1999 ® test center transmits MF test priming information to the ESS -2000 switch which is interpreted by the ROTL program. The ROTL program decodes the priming information and connects a TTF or GDSF tone detector to the trunk under test (TUT) and reserves a TTF responder or GDSF GDG transceiver.
Page 362 235-105-210 October 1999 Responders provide 2-way transmission loss and noise measurements and a variety of other measurements of the trunk under test. The test center controls the measurements of trunks between the near-end office and a far-end office containing the 105-type test line. All measurement results on the trunk under test are sent back to the test center in the form of frequency-shift data signals.
Page 363 235-105-210 October 1999 The test center causes self-checks to be made on both near-end (simulated) and far-end responders for loss, noise, and other tests that are requested. The results of the self-checks are transmitted back to the test center. These tests consist of the following: ...
Page 364 235-105-210 October 1999 Dashes indicate unassigned code-state combinations. The far-end responder applies quiet termination for 2.56 seconds upon receipt of the MF command. The three return-loss tests are: echo return-loss, singing return-loss, and singing return-high loss. All three tests have the same timing.
Page 365 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 7-3 Timing Interval for eturn Loss Measurements The noise with tone measurement is the same as the loss measurement described in Part 7.4.3.1.2 of this section except for the following:  The received tone is processed in the noise measurement path with the addition of a 1000-Hz band rejection filter.
Page 366 235-105-210 October 1999 measurement. The gain slope measurements involve making loss measurements at the following three frequencies and levels:  404 Hz at -16 dBm  1004 Hz at -16 dBm  2804 Hz at -16 dBm. The three frequencies are used to measure the bandwidth of the trunk which is the range of frequencies that the trunk can transmit.
Page 367 An alternative is to request a noise measurement. t will also trigger the guard-data-guard reply, which can be interpreted as a noise reading and converted to the error code. Table 7-5 lists the 5ESS-2000 switch ROTL errors. Table 7-5...
Page 368 235-105-210 October 1999 The terminal balance function of the ROTL involves connecting a tone-and-quiet source to a selected outgoing trunk from the ROTL central office. Upon receipt of the same information as a transmission test, except for a different request code, a call is originated by the ROTL over the selected trunk. When the call terminates, a 1000-Hz start test tone burst is expected by ROTL.
Page 369 235-105-210 October 1999 The assignment of office dependent data is made via the initial office data administration run or recent change menus and view. The data assignments required for ROTL consist of the following:  A trunk group and trunk group member for ROTL test ports ...
Page 370 235-105-210 October 1999 8. FAN AND ALA M TESTS GENE AL This section contains detailed level procedures for fan and alarm tests. Master control center (MCC) display Page 105/106 is used to summarize building/power alarm status, to provide inhibit/allow controls for building alarms, and to provide controls for alarm retire mode. When an alarm condition is present and it is not inhibited, the respective display indicator will backlight, except the F RE indicator.
Page 371 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.1: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved for Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 372 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.2: TEST C ITICAL OFFICE ALA M P OCEDU E Obtain office engineering records Form 5840(02) TG-5, SCAN PO NT NUMBER ASS GNMENT RECORD, showing alarm scan point assignments. Ensure office is in duplex mode (that is, both input/output processor 0 and 1 up) before proceeding. Select a C ITICAL office alarm from office engineering records.
Page 373 235-105-210 October 1999 Now repeat from Step 4. Record results of alarm test(s). STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 374 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.3: TEST MAJO OFFICE ALA M P OCEDU E Obtain office engineering records Form 5840(02) TG-5 SCAN PO NT NUMBER ASS GNMENT RECORD, showing alarm scan point assignments. Ensure office is in duplex mode (that is, input/output processor 0 and 1 up) before proceeding. Select a MAJO office alarm from office engineering records.
Page 375 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, go to Step 12. f NO, continue with Step 10. Select another MAJO office alarm. Repeat from Step 4. Record results of alarm test(s). Table 8.3-1 Simulate Office Alarms ALA M COMMENT Critical Fire Use local procedures. Fire Alarm Trouble Use local procedures.
Page 376 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.4: TEST MINO OFFICE ALA M P OCEDU E Obtain office engineering records Form 5840(02) TG-5 SCAN PO NT NUMBER ASS GNMENT RECORD, showing scan point assignments. Ensure office is in duplex mode (that is, both input/output processor 0 and 1 are up) before proceeding. Select a MINO office alarm from office engineering records.
Page 377 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, continue with Step 10. Select another MINO office alarm. Proceed to Step 4. Record results of alarm test(s). STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 378 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.5: TEST MAJO MISCELLANEOUS ALA M P OCEDU E Obtain office engineering records Form 5840(02) TG-5 SCAN PO NT NUMBER ASS GNMENT RECORD, showing alarm scan point assignments. Ensure office is in duplex mode (that is, input/output processor 0 and 1 are up) before proceeding. Select a MAJO miscellaneous alarm from office engineering records.
Page 379 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, continue with Step 10. Select another MAJO miscellaneous alarm. Proceed to Step 4. Record results of alarm test(s). STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 380 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.6: TEST MINO MISCELLANEOUS ALA M P OCEDU E Obtain office engineering records Form 5840(02) TG-5 SCAN PO NT NUMBER ASS GNMENT RECORD, showing scan point assignments. Ensure office is in duplex mode (that is, both input/output processor 0 and 1 up) before proceeding. Select a MINO miscellaneous alarm from office engineering records.
Page 381 235-105-210 October 1999 Select another MINO miscellaneous alarm. Proceed to Step 4. Record results of alarm test(s). STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 382 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.7: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 383 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.8: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 384 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.9: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 385 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.10: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 386 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.11: ESE VED FO FUTU E USE P OCEDU E Reserved For Future Use Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 387 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.12: TEST OFFICE ALA MS EMOTE SWITCHING MODULE P OCEDU E Obtain office engineering records containing alarm scan point assignments for remote switching module(s) [RSM(s)]. Select SM group (1-48, 49-96, 97-144, or 145-192) for RSM office alarms test. At the master control center (MCC), type and enter: 14x x = 1 for SMs 1-48, 2 for SMs 49-96, 3 for SMs 97-144, or 4 for SMs 145-192.
Page 388 235-105-210 October 1999 At RSM local alarm panel (Figure 8.12-1 ), applicable alarm level (C ITICAL, MAJO , or MINO ), and BLDG/POWE /MISC indicators turn ON. At MCC, applicable alarm level summary status indicator goes ON. SM summary status indicator flashes ON 5 seconds, then remains ON. On 1400 page display, applicable indicator (for example HIGH VOLTAGE) in SM POWE ALA MS group goes ON.
Page 389 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: Alarm level indicator goes OFF. BLDG/PW /MISC indicator remains ON. At RSM site, deactivate selected building/miscellaneous alarm. At RSM local alarm panel, BLDG/PW /MISC indicator goes OFF. Response: On page display, x y z indicator in BUILDING ALA MS group OFF. At ROP, EPT ALM CL BPSC x ESET message printed.
Page 390 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, go to Step 24. f NO, continue with Step 30. Select previously tested building alarm RBPSC 00-01, or previously tested power alarm in range of RBPSC 28-49 for alarm inhibit testing. NOTE: RBPSCs 00, 01, and 28 through 49 range cannot be inhibited because of their importance to any RSM.
Page 391 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 8.12-1 SM Local Alarm Panel Table 8.12-1 Typical Scan Point Assignments Office Alarms - emote Switching Module SCAN POINT UNIT/F AME/CONDITION ALA M LEAD SC00 Fire Alarm a Critical SC01 Fire Alarm Trouble a Major SC02 High Temperature b Major SC03...
Page 392 235-105-210 October 1999 Alarm a SC44 Standby Plant Rectifier Failure Alarm a Minor SC45 Standby Plant Failure Alarm a Major SC46 Misc. Cabinet Fuse Alarm-0 a Major SC47 Misc. Cabinet Fuse Alarm-1 a Major PDF-0 Fuse Failure Alarm a SC48 Major PDF-1 Fuse Failure Alarm a SC49...
Page 393 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.13: PE FO M SWITCHING MODULE FAN ALA M TESTS OVE VIEW CAUTION: With the exception of SM cabinets equipped with J5D003BE-1 fan units, do not remove fuses to simulate fan alarms. Perform one of the following on the fan unit control board to simulate a fan failure that results in system alarm responses: ESET button, or the ESET/TEST switch, or the TEST button.
Page 394 235-105-210 October 1999  ESET/TEST switch  TEST button and the red light-emitting diodes (LEDs) that indicate fan unit status. Perform one of the following on the fan unit control board (10 second limit see following note):  Depress and hold the power ESET button ...
Page 395 235-105-210 October 1999 The red FAN ALA M LED goes off. Response: The yellow FAN ALA M LEDs on top front and rear of the cabinet go off. At the MCC terminal, the SM indicator goes off (if all SMs/SM-2000s are operational). On the 1010 - SM x y STATUS page, the FAN ALM indicator associated with the SM/SM-2000 cabinet clears.
Page 396 235-105-210 October 1999 cabinet clears. At the ROP, the EPT ALM CL FAN SM=x AISLE=z report is printed. Where: x = Selected SM number. y = SM type (for example, HSM) z = Aisle number. Have the fan alarms in all the SM/SM-2000 cabinets been tested? f NO, to test the fan alarms in the next SM/SM-2000 cabinet, repeat from Step 1.
Page 397 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.14: PE FO M COMMUNICATIONS MODULE/TIME-MULTIPLEXED SWITCH FAN ALA M TESTS OVE VIEW CAUTION: Do not remove fuses to simulate fan alarms. The RESET button on the fan unit power control board is used to simulate a fan failure that results in system alarm responses. This procedure checks the system responses for fan alarm circuits.
Page 398 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: x = Selected CM number. Close the front door. Have the fan alarms in all the CM cabinets been tested? f YES, STOP YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E f NO, to test the fan alarms in the next CM cabinet, repeat from Step 2. Copyright ©...
Page 399 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.15: EPLACE FAN UNIT AI FILTE OVE VIEW This procedure replaces the fan unit filter in three types of fan units: J5D003BE and J5D003BN (SM bays), and J5D003FH (CM2C and SM 2000 cabinets). The following identifies the type of filter required for the fan units: Fan Unit Type Filter Type equired a Number of Filters...
Page 400 235-105-210 October 1999 To dry, do not expose unit to high temperatures or direct sunlight. Allow filter to become completely dry before inserting into equipment. Dispose of UAF233 air filter per local procedures. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright ©...
Page 401 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.16: EPLACE FAN T AY AI -FILTE S IN SCSI CABINET OVE VIEW This procedure replaces the UAF204 filter in the SCS (small computer systems interface) cabinet in the Administration Module Fan Cooling Unit ED4C387-30. There are two filter units side-by-side in the unit above the fans.
Page 402 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.17: EPLACE 340-MB MOVING HEAD DISK (MHD) AI FILTE OVE VIEW NOTE: Service filters at least every 6 months per equipment test list or more often if conditions dictate. The disk drive should be spun down during filter replacement for two reasons: (1) f drive is powered up, loose dirt which may fall from the filter during removal could be sucked into the drive;...
Page 403: Figure 8.17-1 Front View Of Disk Drive
235-105-210 October 1999 At the power switch, the OFF and ALM LEDs go out. Response: EPT POWE ESTO ED MHD a ST MHD a STOPPED x'5 Where: a = member number of the particular MHD. Figure 8.17-1 Front View of Disk Drive Spin up the drive by depressing the STA T button at the particular MHD.
Page 404 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MHD power switch, operate the ST/ OS switch to ST. Response: ST MHD a COMPLETED At the power switch, the OOS and QIP LEDs go off. Do more MHDs need filter replacement? f YES, repeat from Step 1. f NO, STOP.
Page 405 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.18: EPLACE FAN UNIT AI FILTE S IN ISLU D AWE -TYPE UNITS OVE VIEW This procedure replaces the UAF235 filter in the SLU (integrated service line unit) drawer-type fan unit. The unit contains three fans and one UAF235 filter. The filter is accessed from the rear of the drawer unit. NOTE 1: Service air filters at least every 6 months per equipment test list or more often if conditions dictate.
Page 406 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 8.18-1 ear View of Drawer-Type Unit STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 407 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.19: TEST P OCESSO CONT OL F AME O P OCESSO CABINET ALA MS OVE VIEW NOTE 1: Terminal common processor displays must indicate all units active (ACT) and one control unit (CU) standby (STBY) before starting this procedure. NOTE 2: Before starting this procedure, control unit (CU) 1 should be active (ACT) and CU 0 should be standby (STBY).
Page 408 235-105-210 October 1999 Perform Steps 11 through 14 for each of the units listed in the following illustration. ILLUST ATION POWER UN T CAB NET/FRAME LOCAT ON 495FA - A 064 - 002 495FA - B 064 - 003 495FA - D 056 - 003 495FA - G 038 - 005...
Page 409 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, go to Step 24. f NO, continue with the next step. At the MCC terminal, type and enter: ESET:FANALM CU a; Where: a = 0 or 1. EPT MULTIPLE FAN ALA M CLEA ED message received. Response: FAN A and B LEDs off.
Page 410 235-105-210 October 1999 Relatch DCF power unit that was unlatched in Step 32. At selected DFC power switch TN3, in applicable PC bay, operate ON switch. Response: EPT POWE UP or EPT OUT OF SE VICE or EPT FAULT CLEA ED message received.
Page 411 235-105-210 October 1999 Perform Steps 45 through 50 for each of the power units listed in the following illustration. ILLUST ATION POWER UN T CAB NET/FRAME LOCAT ON 495FA - H 036 - 178 494GA - C 036 - 024 495FA - E 045 - 016 Unlatch and unseat power unit.
Page 412 235-105-210 October 1999 Has test been run for both CU 0, DFC 0, OP 0, and CU 1, DFC 1, AND OP 1? f YES, STOP. Processor control frame or processor cabinet alarms tested. f NO, continue with the next step. At the MCC terminal, in order to make CU 0 active, type and enter: SW:CU 0;...
Page 413 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.20: CHECK LIGHT-EMITTING DIODES (LEDs) P OCEDU E Locate unit power switch in Table 8.20-1 . Toggle ACO/T switch to right. Response: All power switch LEDs are lighted. s TN5 power switch being tested? f YES, continue with the next step. f NO, go to Step 5.
Page 414 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.21: TEST POWE CONT OL UNIT LEDs (300-MB MHDs) P OCEDU E At 300-megabyte (MB) moving head disk (MHD) frame control unit, momentarily operate ACO/T switch. Response: All power control unit light-emitting diodes (LEDs) light. Verify the above response was obtained. Verify that all LEDs light when TEST/ TMJ switch is held in the TEST position momentarily.
Page 415 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.22: TEST 340-Mb MOVING HEAD DISK (MHD) ALA M P OCEDU E Remove MHD from service. Procedure 10.19 Reference: At the particular MHD, spin down the disk by depressing the STA T button. Response: STA T LED is flashing at first. As soon as the STA T LED goes off, the disk is spun down. NOTE: A description of the various disk configurations (or layouts) can be found in Section 9 of this document.
Page 416: Figure 8.22-1 340-Mb Mhd Ks-22997,L2 Power Supply
235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 8.22-1 340-Mb MHD KS-22997,L2 Power Supply At power switch, verify that ALM and OFF LEDs are lighted (Figure 8.22-2 ). Figure 8.22-2 ED-4C481 Power Switch Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 417 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify that EPT POWE DOWN MHD message is received and major and minor audible alarms sound. At power switch, depress ACO/T momentarily, and then depress OFF switch. At power supply, push MAIN circuit breaker (CB) to on. Spin up the drive by depressing the STA T button at the particular MHD.
Page 418 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.23: TEST OFFICE EXIT PILOT ALA M CI CUITS OVE VIEW This procedure provides information to verify the operation of alarm circuits. To determine the state of the alarm circuits requires that a fault be simulated resulting in appropriate displays at the master control center (MCC) terminal and output message(s) on the receive only printer (ROP).
Page 419 235-105-210 October 1999 At the exit pilot alarm lamp array, the red MAJOR alarm lamp remains on. At the MCC terminal, to turn off the exit pilot lamps, type and enter: CL :LAMPS; Response: At the ROP, PF is printed. At the ROP, CLR LAMPS COMPLETED is printed.
Page 420 235-105-210 October 1999 Air dryer Remove fuse of power ON air dryer. Door intrusion Open door. Air conditioner Remove power at AC power outlet. Miscellaneous power supplies Not applicable. Miscellaneous alarm circuit Not applicable. Discharge fuse fail On power plant, short pins 8 and 9 on any of the circuit breakers. nverter fail To simulate loss of -48 volts from the inverter, short pins 2 and 3 on TB5 of K1 relay of the inverter.
Page 421 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 8.24: ISLU FAN ALA M TESTS OVE VIEW CAUTION: Any equipment that is taken out of service by these fuse/alarm tests must be allowed to recover before proceeding with this procedure. This procedure verifies that the major alarm condition caused by an inoperative fan in an SLU drawer can be detected and that the proper indications are given.
Page 422 235-105-210 October 1999 being tested lights. The yellow Fan Alarm LEDs light on front and rear bezel covers of frame. The MAJO indicator at the top of the MCC screen lights and the SM rectangle flashes. At MCC 1010,x page, the FAN ALM indicator lights RED and the SM STAT status indicator shows FAN/FUSE in reverse video.
Page 423 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: x = SM number z = Aisle number To test the software alarm retire, select the same fan as selected in Step 2. MV:ISLULGC=a-b-c,UCL; Remove from service the Line Group of the fan to be tested by entering Where: a = SM number.
Page 424 235-105-210 October 1999 At the SM, reseat the Line Group circuit pack [KCD 3 or KCD 3(B)] that was unseated in Step 13. At MCC type and enter: CL :FANALM,SM=x; Where: x = SM number Response: Red LED corresponding to fan being tested turns OFF. Yellow LEDs extinguish on front and rear bezel covers of frame.
Page 425 KS specifications is not recommended. These non-KS disks are not properly formatted and do not have the defect tables written on them. Since it is not recommended that the 5ESS-2000 switch write to non-KS disks, there is a high risk of a spare not being immediately available if a failure should occur.
Page 426 235-105-210 October 1999 The 5E10 and later software releases support three layouts for 1GB optional disk pairs running in an office with a 3B21D processor. The options are as follows:  Option 1: This option provides two disk partitions (each equal to one-half of the available disk space) for AMA data.
Page 427 235-105-210 October 1999 Growth is a hardware procedure that adds an additional disk, or disk pair, to an existing office. Growth includes addition of SCS frames and disks for preparation of a retrofit. Conversion is a procedure that replaces one type of disk hardware with a newer type. Retrofit is a procedure that replaces an existing software release with a later software release or a newer version of the existing software release.
Page 428 235-105-210 October 1999 Disk reconfiguration consists of a written procedure and a set of tools to support that procedure. Normally the disk reconfiguration tools are transmitted to an office electronically using the software change administration and notification system (SCANS) utility just prior to the time of the reconfiguration procedure. To obtain a current copy of the disk reconfiguration tools, contact the North American Regional Technical Assistance Center (NARTAC) at 1-800-225-7822.
Page 429 235-105-210 October 1999 9.2.5.1 OVE VIEW The disk reconfiguration tools are made up of shell scripts, VTOCs, RCV keystroke files, data/information files, and ``C'' object files. Usually the disk reconfiguration tools are implemented as shell scripts. However, in some cases it is much easier, and more efficient, to use a ``C'' program.
Page 430 235-105-210 October 1999 The 5E9 and later software releases contain a minimum of four and a maximum of nine ODD partitions that must be copied from the active disk system to the off-line disk system during the disk reconfiguration procedure. These files are as follows: ...
Page 431 235-105-210 October 1999 n software releases 5E9 and later, this file is printed after the SM ODD partitions [no5sodd(1-6)] have been copied to the off-line disk. The first part of the file contains a list of the ODD files in each of the no5sodd(1-6) partitions of the active system.
Page 432 235-105-210 October 1999 9.2.7 EMOTE DISK CONFIGU ATION CAUTION 1: f both MHD 0 and MHD 1 have been swapped with other MHDs using the remote disk configuration feature, the system will most likely not recover from a level 52 or higher boot. When remote disk configuration is used, the system should be allowed to remain in this condition for as short a time as possible.
Page 433 235-105-210 October 1999 After the previous messages are entered, a EPT MHD output message will be printed showing the paired MHDs on their corresponding MDCT forms with the swapped MHDs indicated by an ``*''. This output message will repeat approximately every hour as long as the configuration is nonstandard. A manual request to produce this information can be entered by using the OP:MHD:CFG input message.
Page 434 235-105-210 October 1999 The user is provided with input messages to inhibit and allow the feature on a per-MHD basis as well as on the entire office. The formats of these messages are as follows: INH:AUTOCFG[:MHD=x]; ALW:AUTOCFG[:MHD=x]; nput messages are also provided to manually switch the configuration of the MHDs. These messages provide the following functions: switch the configuration of any two MHDs, configure a spare MHD for a specified defective MHD, and configure the office to the normal MHD configuration either office wide or on a specified MHD.
Page 435 235-105-210 October 1999 9.2.8.2.4.4 Automatic MHD Configuration Status Page (Page 179) Display Page 179 shows, in detail, the configuration of all the MHDs. 9.2.8.3 Control Files This feature was designed to Bell Communications Research, nc., specifications. One of the specifications stipulated that ``turning on'' and ``turning off'' (as opposed to ``allow'' and ``inhibit'') were to be noncasual operations, since each telephone company may want to do these as matter of policy within their company.
Page 436 235-105-210 October 1999 10. MOVING HEAD DISK P OCEDU ES GENE AL Section 10 contains detailed level procedures for converting, connecting, or replacing moving head disks (MHDs). t also contains disk reconfiguration procedures and remote disk configuration procedures. Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 437 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.1: CONNECT OFF-LINE SPA E DISK IN A UNNING SYSTEM (340MB MHD 3B20D ONLY) P OCEDU E CAUTION: Operational testing of the off-line spare MHD by rotating it into service should not be performed more often then once every 7 days. Great care must be taken when detaching and attaching the connector to the disk file controller (DFC) since pins can be bent.
Page 438 235-105-210 October 1999 MHD-1), and Plug "1" is for logical device 1 (MHD-2 and MHD-3). f a logical indicator plug labeled 0 was not available in Step 1 of this procedure, then switch the logical indicator plug from the defective MHD into the spare MHD. To power up the power controller for the off-line spare MHD, depress the ON switch on the power controller.
Page 439 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.2: ESTO E MOVING HEAD DISK (MHD) TO SE VICE P OCEDU E At master control center (MCC), to restore MHD to service, type and enter: ST:MHD=a; Where: a = unit number of MHD. Response: ST MHD=a COMPLETED is printed. At MCC, to verify that MHD is restored to service, type and enter: OP:OOS;...
Page 440 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.3: FO MAT AND VE IFY FO MATTING OF MOVING HEAD DISK (MHD) OVE VIEW CAUTION: This procedure is intended for new disks. This procedure is NOT intended to be performed on in-service disks. f you are having a problem with a disk for which you think reformatting is necessary, you should determine the problem via defect management which will automatically perform an initialization.
Page 441 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.4: POWE UP AND ESTO E DFC TO SE VICE P OCEDU E Note: When disk file controller (DFC) is powered up, diagnostics are run automatically and DFC is automatically restored to service. At DFC to be powered up, depress ON switch. OFF LED goes out and QIP LED momentarily lights to indicate request was honored.
Page 442 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.5: CONNECT CABLING TO OFF-LINE SPA E MHD P OCEDU E Caution: Great care must be taken when detaching and attaching the connector to the disk file controller (DFC) since the backplane pins can be bent. At the DFC of the defective moving head disk (MHD), connect the signal (data) cable of the spare MHD to the DFC at the DFC end.
Page 443 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.6: EMOVE MOVING HEAD DISK (MHD) F OM SE VICE P OCEDU E NOTE: MHD be verified using Procedure 10.13 before removing the MHD from service. t is recommended that the MHD being removed from service and the mate At the master control center (MCC), to remove the MHD from service, type and enter: MV:MHD=a;...
Page 444 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.7: EMOVE DISK FILE CONT OLLE (DFC) F OM SE VICE P OCEDU E At the master control center (MCC), to remove the specified DFC and associated moving head disks (MHDs) from service, type and enter: MV:DFC=a; a = Member number.
Page 445 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.8: POWE DOWN AND EMOVE CABLES F OM DFC-0 P OCEDU E At the disk file controller 0 (DFC-0), to power down the DFC-0, simultaneously depress OFF switch and MO switch. OFF LED lights. Response: Disconnect and remove signal (data) cable between DFC-0 and MHD-2. Remove the bus terminating resistor (BTR) plug from MHD-2.
Page 446 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.9: EPLACE 340-MB MOVING HEAD DISK D IVE OVE VIEW CAUTION: Damage may result if the next steps are performed before the MHD is thoroughly warm. Start procedure only after disk is environmentally conditioned. For disks that were stored in greatly different temperatures than the office ambient, allow 1 hour per 27°F (15°C) before powering up the MHD.
Page 447 235-105-210 October 1999 Carefully slide out the affected drive and uncable it. Slide the defective MHD forward a few inches to aid in physically identifying the drive from the rear of the unit prior to cable removal. NOTE: Use Table 10.9-1 to identify the correct cable connection for the affected disk drive. Table 10.9-1 Moving Head Disk Drive Cable Configuration CABLE PLUG...
Page 448 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, to obtain the defect table listing, type and enter: DUMP:MHD=a:DEFECT:MFG ; a = Member number of the replaced moving head disk. Where: DUMP MHD a DEFECT TABLE COMPLETED Response: Compare the manufacturer's defect table, delivered with the disk, with the one generated by the system. Are they the same? f YES, proceed to Step 17.
Page 449 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: ST:MHD=a; a = Member number of the replaced moving head disk. Where: At power switch, the OOS and QIP LEDs go off. Response: ST MHD a COMPLETED At the MCC, to obtain the defect table listing, type and enter: DUMP:MHD=a:DEFECT:ALL;...
Page 450 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.10: EXECUTE THE ACTIVATE FO M P OCEDU E At the master control center (MCC), do Steps 2 through 5. On forms selection page, to access activate form, type and enter: activate. activate form is displayed. Response: To copy the incore data to disk, type and enter: y To execute the activate form, type and enter: e...
Page 451 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.11: UPDATE DATA BASE BACKUP P OCEDU E NOTE: This updates the application backup root file system and thereby eliminates the possibility of removing the new channel. At master control center (MCC), do Steps 3 through 8. To make a directory for the file system, type and enter: IN:FILESYS,DI ,FN="/bdb";...
Page 452 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.12: POWE DOWN AND EMOVE CABLING F OM DEFECTIVE MOVING HEAD DISK (MHD) P OCEDU E CAUTION: Great care must be taken when detaching and attaching the connector to the disk drive since the connector can break if screwed down too tightly. At specified disk file controller (DFC), simultaneously depress OFF switch and MO switch.
Page 453 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.13: VE IFY MHD INTEG ITY OVE VIEW This procedure verifies moving head disk (MHD) integrity and does not require simplexing the MHD community; therefore, it is not necessary for a craftperson to be at the site when this procedure is performed. This procedure makes uses the compare (CMP ) and verify (VFY) commands.
Page 454 235-105-210 October 1999 00 01 * * 6 cd /cft/sh1;/cft/bin/pdsenv "CMPR:MHD 0,RO!" 00 02 * * 6 CD /cft/sh1;/cft/bin/pdsenv "VFY:MHD 0!" * means don't care. All commands in the crontab must be in PDS format. Figure 10.13-1 Example to un CMP :MHD at 1 a.m. and VFY:MHD at 2 a.m. on MHD 0 Every Saturday At a recent change terminal or trunk line work station, type and enter the following message in order to enter ®...
Page 455 235-105-210 October 1999 n order to schedule the VFY:MHD command, type and enter: mm hh dd MM DD "VFY:MHD x!" mm = Minutes of the hour this command is to be executed (00-59). Where: hh = Hour in which this command is to be executed (00-23). dd = Day of the month the command is to be executed (1-31).
Page 456 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.14: ECENT CHANGE UPDATE PE FO MED DU ING DISK ECONFIGU ATION P OCEDU E At the master control center (MCC) video terminal, type and enter command 199 in order to access the equipment configuration data base (ECD). Response: database_name: Type and enter: incore.
Page 457 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter: <ret>. k-unit name: Response: Type and enter: MHD. k_unit_number: Response: Type and enter: 0. Response: The UCB form for MHD 0 is displayed Enter Update, Change..Type and enter: c. Change Field: Response: Type and enter: 21. major_status: Response: NOTE: For major_status:, enter the same value that is already in the field so that this procedure...
Page 458 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter: <ret>. apply_tr: Response: Type and enter: <ret>. Response: o_missing_links: Type and enter: <ret>. Enter Execute, Change..Response: Type and enter: e. Enter Form Name: Response: Type and enter: <. esults: Recent change update performed during disk reconfiguration. STOP.
Page 459 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.15: POWE UP 300-MB SMD MOVING HEAD DISK D IVE P OCEDU E f the 46-volt breaker is off, reset the 46-volt breaker. Push the fault indicator light. Response: The fault indicator light goes off. Push the start switch to turn the drive on. Wait for the disk to come up to speed ( EADY lamp stops flashing and remains on).
Page 460 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.16: SWAP DISK PACKS IN 300-MB SMD MOVING HEAD DISK D IVE OVE VIEW This procedure describes the swapping of disk packs in the 300-MB storage module device (SMD) moving head disk (MHD) drive. The covers of the disk drive should never be left open longer than the time it takes to change disks.
Page 461 235-105-210 October 1999 Push the start switch to turn the drive off. Reset the 46-volt breaker. Push the fault indicator light. Response: The fault indicator light goes off. Push the start switch to turn the drive on. Wait for the disk to come up to speed ( EADY lamp stops flashing and remains on). Return to the procedure that directed you here.
Page 462 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.17: CONVE T MHD OPTIONAL DISK PAI TO 2GB - 5E14 AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure reconfigures small computer system interface (SCS ) moving head disks (MHD) to a 2 gigabyte (2GB) storage capacity, specifically for optional pair MHDs. The following four conditions must be satisfied before proceeding with this procedure.
Page 463 235-105-210 October 1999 P OCEDU E 10.17.1 Initialize ECD ecent Change and Verify At the Supplementary Trunk & Line Workstation (STLWS), select CMD mode. To enter the ECD, type and enter command 199 esponse: CV ECD Parameter info form displayed. Cursor at database_name attribute.
Page 464 235-105-210 October 1999 DFC(UN580) 0x13 DFC2(UN373) 0x12 DFC1(UN294,v1) 0x11 What is the value of the u_model field 66? f 9,8, or 7, then continue with next Step. f other, then seek technical assistance, and do not continue until DFC configuration has been resolved. Record the value of the corresponding mv field (xxxx).
Page 465 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Transaction Begin form displayed. Cursor moves to tr_name attribute. Enter CA IAGE ETU N. esponse: Enter Execute, Change, Substitute, Validate, or Print: Type and enter e . esponse: executing... FO M EXECUTED Cursor at Enter Form Name attribute. 10.17.3.3 Update EQUIPAGE and MV Fields For Even-Numbered MHD Type and enter ucb esponse:...
Page 466 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter xxxx Where: xxxx = mv value recorded in Section 10.17.2 , Step 11. esponse: Change Field Enter CA IAGE ETU N esponse: Enter Update, Change, Substitute, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter u esponse: updating...
Page 467 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: EPT CV COMPLETED 10.17.3.5 estore Even MHD to Service At the STLWS terminal, select MSG mode. To restore even MHD to service, type and enter ST:MHD=x; Where: number of even MHD esponse: ST MHD x Started ST MHD x Completed To verify MHD restored to ACT VE state, toggle CMD mode, and select page 123.
Page 468 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter * esponse: executing... FO M EXECUTED. Cursor at Enter Form Name attribute. Type and enter trbegin esponse: Transaction Begin form displayed. Cursor moves to tr_name attribute. Enter CA IAGE ETU N. esponse: Enter Execute, Change, Substitute, Validate, or Print: Type and enter e .
Page 469 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Change Field Type and enter 27 esponse: Cursor moves to mv attribute. Type and enter xxxx Where: xxxx = mv value recorded in Section 10.17.2 , Step 11. esponse: Change Field Enter CA IAGE ETU N esponse: Enter Update, Change, Substitute, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter u...
Page 470 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: executing... FO M EXECUTED. Cursor at Enter Form Name attribute. Type and enter < esponse: EPT CV COMPLETED 10.17.4.5 estore Odd MHD to Service At the STLWS terminal, select MSG mode. To restore odd MHD to service, type and enter ST:MHD=x; Where: number of odd MHD esponse:...
Page 471 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.18: OFF-LINE PUMP ALL SWITCHING MODULES (SMs) OVE VIEW The term switching module (SM) as used in this procedure refers to all modules; local SMs (LSMs), home SMs (HSMs), remote SMs (RSMs), etc. The disk reconfiguration procedure 10.21 requires an off-line pump of all SMs after switching to the new disk configuration.
Page 472 235-105-210 October 1999 Access MCC Pages 141, 142, etc. CAUTION: When each MCTS Side 0 is switched and forced active by ORD:CP , that MCTS is "reset" and undergoes a single-process purge (SPP). NOTE: The 1&&192 in the following message (Step a) is used to simultaneously broadcast an "ORD:CP " to all SMs (with no delay between each message).
Page 473 235-105-210 October 1999 ST:OPUMP,SM=1&&192,OFLDISK,VFY,NPE F; Response: EPT SM=a OFFLINE PUMP COMPLETED (on ROP) . . . EPT SM=z OFFLINE PUMP COMPLETED (on ROP) Use MCC Pages 181, 182, etc., to view the off-line pump status for the SMs. The following is a list of the different states of the mate memory that will be displayed on MCC Page 181 during off-line pump.
Page 474 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.19: EMOVE OPE ATIONAL MHD F OM SE VICE OVE VIEW When removing a target moving head disk (MHD) from service, this procedure verifies the integrity of the mate MHD before removing the target MHD from service. This procedure makes use of the verify (VFY) command to assure that the target MHD can be restored to duplex operation with the mate MHD.
Page 475 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.20: UPDATE DEFECT TABLE OF SCSI DISK D IVES (322MB, 600MB, 1GB) OVE VIEW CAUTION: Contact your next level of technical support for assistance before performing this procedure. This procedure is used to add defects to the combined (growing) defect table of a small computer system interface (SCS ) disk drive.
Page 476 235-105-210 October 1999 x = MHD number of disk. Where: DUMP FILE ALL COMPLETED xxxxx Response: The contents of the defect block file. Does this dump file equal the source list? f YES, continue with the next step. f NO, STOP and seek technical assistance. Verify the disk that will remain in service while the disk in question is being updated.
Page 477 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: EPT CL FILESYS COMPLETE Verify the disk. Type and enter: VFY:MHD=x; x = MHD number of disk. Where: VFY MHD x COMPLETED Response: Did the verify succeed? f YES, continue with the next step. f NO, record the NEW block failures and repeat from Step 2. Restore MHD to service.
Page 478 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.21: PE FO M DISK ECONFIGU ATION P OCEDU E OVE VIEW Disk reconfiguration is not a tool that will clean up a dirty system. n fact, it will probably make things worse than they already are. The office must meet ALL of the following conditions before attempting a disk reconfiguration: ...
Page 479 235-105-210 October 1999 n software release 5E12, the "11" configuration is supported on both the 3B20D and 3B21D processors. Prior to the 5E12 software release only the 600 and 322 megabyte (MB) VTOC (volume table of contents) were allowed on the secondary disk pair (63 configuration) and could be used on the 3B20D processor. n the 5E12 a small or medium VTOC (322 or 600 MB) is still allowed on the outboard (optional) drives.
Page 480 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter the following message: INH: C; INH C COMPLETED Response: Enter the following message to remove any scheduled ODD backups: CL :ODDBKUP; CL ODDBKUP COMPLETED Response: Enter the following message to perform a complete ODD backup for the AM and all SMs: BKUP:ODD;...
Page 481 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: DUMP FILE ALL COMPLETED 1 no5dodd1 is the current disk odd Was the expected response received in the previous step? f YES, continue with the next step. f NO, STOP and seek technical assistance. Do NOT continue. Enter the following messages to stop all scheduled routine exercises: INH:DMQ:S C= EX;...
Page 482 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter the following message to determine if Automatic MHD Configuration is allowed: OP:MHD:CFG; AUTO MHD CONFIGU ATION NOT PE MITTED Response: Was the expected response received in the preceding step? f YES, go to Step 18. f NO, continue with the next step. Enter the following message to inhibit Automatic MHD Configuration during the disk reconfiguration procedure.
Page 483 235-105-210 October 1999 README2. Continue with Step 24. CAUTION: Using a tools tape which is not marked as shown below could result in reconfiguring the office to an invalid disk configuration. f you have any doubts about your tools tape, seek technical assistance before proceeding with the disk reconfiguration procedure.
Page 484 235-105-210 October 1999 CAUTION: Do not continue until this step has successfully completed. This step checks the ROOT data base to make sure that all odd MHDs have a status of OOS. Enter the following message: EXC:ENVI :UP OC,FN="/updtmp/site/chkrootdb"; Response: <...
Page 485 235-105-210 October 1999 1000, 600, 322, 340 Note 3 wwyy [S, M, L)][ 0, 25, 50, 75, or 100% AMA] Note 4 zzzz 1000, 600, 322, 340, or Unknown Note 5 CAUTION: The columns under the ``VTOCS'' and ``SG DATA BASE'' headings must agree with each other line for line.
Page 486 235-105-210 October 1999 5E10 and Earlier Software elease PLEASE ENTER THE CURRENT BASE DISK CONFIGURATION. 1. 63 2. 66 3. 11 (See Note 1) 4. Terminate The Script. Enter Selection (1, 2, 3, or 4) : 5E11 Software elease PLEASE ENTER THE CURRENT BASE DISK CONFIGURATION. 1.
Page 487 235-105-210 October 1999 Four (MHD 0 - MHD 7) Five (MHD 0 - MHD 9) (MHD 0 - MHD 11) Seven (MHD 0 - MHD 13) Eight (MHD 0 - MHD 13, MHD 16 - MHD 17) Nine (MHD 0 - MHD 13, MHD 16 - MHD 19) (MHD 0 - MHD 13, MHD 16 - MHD 21)
Page 488 235-105-210 October 1999 PLEASE ENTER THE CURRENT BASE DISK CONFIGURATION. 1. 63 2. 66 3. 11 4. Terminate The Script. Enter Selection (1, 2, 3, or 4) : When this screen is displayed, type and enter the digit (1, 2, or 3) corresponding to the desired new base disk configuration.
Page 489 235-105-210 October 1999 This screen determines how to configure an optional disk pair in the new disk configuration. There is a different screen for software releases and 5E9.2, and 5E10 and later. t is displayed for each optional disk pair that exists in the new disk configuration. This screen is not displayed for disks in the MHD 16 to MHD 31 range since they can only be assigned the "All AMA"...
Page 490 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Selection (1, 2, 3, or 4): Where: w = disk pair number. x = member number of the even MHD of the pair. y = member number of the odd MHD of the pair. When this screen is displayed, type and enter the digit (1 - 3) corresponding to the option desired for the disk pair displayed on the screen.
Page 491 235-105-210 October 1999 THE NEW DISK CONFIGURATION WILL BE CONSTRUCTED AS FOLLOWS: Base Disk Configuration RT 2 (MHD 4 - MHD RT 3 (MHD 6 - MHD 7) RT 4 (MHD 8 - MHD 9) (MHD 10 - MHD 11) RT 6 (MHD 12 - MHD 13) RT 8...
Page 492 235-105-210 October 1999 SM ODD (no sodd ) = xx% SM ODD (no sodd6) = xx% CHECKVARS COMPLETED Where: xx = a number greater than 0 and less than or equal to 100. NOTE: The SM ODD information will only be printed for partitions that actually exist on the new disk configuration.
Page 493 235-105-210 October 1999 SG2BASE COMPLETED - dmert CONVOFLDB COMPLETED NOTE 1: A summary of the operations that were performed on the off-line data base is printed on the ROP. Save the ROP output for future reference and/or analysis. NOTE 2: This step mounts a partition on the off-line disk with read/write access which causes the generation of mount and unmount PRMs.
Page 494 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE 4: As each off-line superblock is cleared, `coflsb` suspends activity as noted in the error file under the /temp directory. This is a normal condition. CAUTION: Do not continue until this step has successfully completed and all ROP output has been thoroughly checked.
Page 495 235-105-210 October 1999 W T:AMADATA; W T AMA DATA HAS BEEN W ITTEN TO DISK Response: EADY TO T ANSFE DATA F OM DISK TO OUTPUT MEDIUM To verify that all AMA data has been written to disk, enter the following message: OP:AMA,DISK;...
Page 496 235-105-210 October 1999 SW:PO TSW; Response: SW PO TSW COMPLETED FO SW PO TSW COMPLETED FO MTTY CAUTION: Do not continue until this step has successfully completed. CAUTION: Check again to ensure that CU 0 and MHD 1 are both forced active on the EA page before continuing with this step.
Page 497 235-105-210 October 1999 instructions to check the ROP output and/or manually reenter the message. Was a warning message printed with instructions to reenter a message? f YES, reenter the message and continue with the next step. f NO, go to Step 58. Did the reentered message also fail? f YES, STOP and seek technical assistance.
Page 498 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, continue with the next step. f NO, go to Step 91. Get everyone out of recent change and keep them out until the rest of this disk reconfiguration procedure has been completed. Enter the following message: INH: C;...
Page 499 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: DISK CONFIGURATION AS DETERMINED FROM THE VTOCS AND SG DATA BASE VTOCS MHD SIZE SG DATA BASE -------- -------- -------------- Base Disk Configuration xxxx xxxx RT 2 (MHD 4 - MHD wwyy zzzz wwyy RT 3 (MHD 6 - MHD 7) wwyy zzzz...
Page 500 235-105-210 October 1999 not supported for 5E10 and later. This step dumps the VTOCs for all of the odd MHDs on the ROP. Save the ROP output for future reference and/or analysis. AMA and no5sodd partition sizes may be compared to known partition sizes for the desired VTOC to verify the contents of the dump.
Page 501 235-105-210 October 1999 # = member number of the highest-numbered SM in the office. Where: O D CPI x CMD SW 0 COMPLETED <repeated for each SM> Response: x = SM member number Where: NOTE: This step results in a single-process purge in each SM that switched. Did the switch pass for all SMs? f YES, go to Step 75.
Page 502 235-105-210 October 1999 ST:MCTSI=a&&b-c,UCL; a = member number of the first SM in the office Where: b = member number of the highest-numbered SM in the office c = controller 0 or 1. Response: ST MCTSI=x-c COMPLETED <repeated for each SM> x = SM member number Where: c = module control unit number...
Page 503 235-105-210 October 1999 MVTOOLS COMPLETED Response: CAUTION: f the script determines that one of the input messages failed, a warning message will be printed with instructions to check the ROP output and/or manually reenter the message. f a reentered message also fails, seek technical assistance. Do NOT continue. Any automatic ODD backups that were scheduled for the office were removed in Step 3.
Page 504 235-105-210 October 1999 CAUTION: Performing the following steps switches the system back onto the old disk configuration and aborts the entire disk reconfiguration procedure. The following steps are performed when one of the following occurs:  A critical test of the new disk configuration has failed. ...
Page 505 235-105-210 October 1999  Allows error checks (ERRCHK) for the entire system.  Allows hardware checks (HDWCHK), software checks (SFTCHK), and automatic pumps (PUMP) for all SMs. Enter the following message: EXC:ENVI :UP OC,FN="/updtmp/site/chkmounts",args="ucl"; CHKMOUNTS COMPLETED Response: f the previous step determines that one of the input messages failed, a warning message is printed with instructions to check the ROP output and/or manually reenter the message.
Page 506 235-105-210 October 1999 EXC:ENVI :UP OC,FN="/updtmp/site/rmvtools",args="ucl"; MVTOOLS COMPLETED Response: CAUTION: f the script determines that one of the input messages failed, a warning message will be printed with instructions to check the ROP output and/or manually reenter the message. f a reentered message also fails, STOP and seek technical assistance.
Page 507 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.22: EPLACE SCSI MOVING HEAD DISK D IVE OVE VIEW f you have a 3B20D Processor, begin with Procedure 10.22.1. f you have a 3B21D Processor, go to Procedure 10.22.2. P OCEDU E Replace SCS Moving Head Disk Drive 10.22.1 eplace SCSI Moving Head Drive Disk Unit Package (DUP) -- 3B20D Processor Refer to Figures 10.22.1-1 and 10.22.1-2 to determine the appropriate SBUS numbers for the affected...
Page 508 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.22.1-2 SCSI/SMD Configuration (3B21D) At the Master Control Center (MCC), remove the SBUS controlling the affected disk drive DUP from service by typing and entering: MV:SBUS=x; MV SBUS x TASK n MESSAGE STA TED Response: MV MHD y COMPLETED (Repeated for each DUP on SBUSx) MV SBUS x COMPLETED OOS LED lights on all drives controlled by SBUSx Where:...
Page 509 235-105-210 October 1999 Remove fuse at the top of the frame for the affected DUP. Disconnect cables from the affected DUP. Remove DUP clamp-down bracket on the front of the disk shelf and carefully slide out the affected drive. Replace the DUP. Set the D switch on the replacement DUP to the same value as the DUP being replaced via the thumbwheel switch on the front panel of the DUP.
Page 510 235-105-210 October 1999 /etc/rcvtoc VTOC EAD AND COMPA E SUCCESSFUL Where: y = 14 or 15 NOTE: n the following step, if the affected DUP is a system disk (MHD 0 or MHD 1), restore it first. At the affected DUP, ensure that the OS/ ST switch is in the ST position. At the MCC, to restore all drives on SBUSx, type and enter: ST:MHD=y;...
Page 511 235-105-210 October 1999 MV SBUS x TASK n MESSAGE STA TED Response: MV MHD y COMPLETED (Repeated for each MHD on SBUSx) MV MT z COMPLETED (Repeated for each magnetic tape drive, if any) MV SBUS x COMPLETED OOS LED lights on all drives controlled by SBUSx Where: n = task number x = number of the SBUS controlling the affected disk drive...
Page 512 235-105-210 October 1999 INIT MHD y COMPLETED f the replaced MHD is a software backup disk (MHD 14 or MHD 15), type and enter: EXC:ENVI :UP OC,FN="/etc/rcvtoc",A GS=y; Where: y = 14 or 15 EXC ENVI UP OC /etc/rcvtoc COMPLETED Response: vcp: disk copy completed vcp: disk copy completed...
Page 513 235-105-210 October 1999 DUMP:MHD=y,DEFECT; Where: y = MHD number DUMP MHD y DEFECT TABLE STA TED Response: COMBINED (G OWN) DEFECT TABLE 0 DEFECTS CYL HEAD SECT DUMP MHD y DEFECT TABLE COMPLETED SCSI DEFECT COUNT CHECK COMPLETED Are all MHDs that were removed from service now restored to service? f NO, continue restoration on remaining drives until complete.
Page 514 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.23: PE FO M OFF-LINE DUMP OVE VIEW f all other procedures fail to restore terminal access, the computer may have to be booted. To assist your technical-assistance organization in finding and correcting causes of terminal suspends and other system anomalies, take an off-line dump when a terminal suspend occurs and a system boot is required.
Page 515 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.24: EPLACE SCSI DISK MODULE OVE VIEW This procedure contains information for replacing Small Computer System nterface (SCS ) Disk Unit Package (DUP) Subunits. CAUTION 1: Wear a properly grounded wrist strap throughout this procedure as electrostatic discharge may damage the disk module.
Page 516 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.24-1 KS-23483,L13 Disk Drive Cable Connection - ear View Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 517 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.24-2 KS-23483,L21 Disk Drive Cable Connection - ear View Copyright © 1999 Page 3...
Page 518 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.24-3 KS-23841,L15 Disk Drive Cable Connection - ear View Copyright © 1999 Page 4...
Page 519 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.24-4 KS-23841,L17 Disk Drive Cable Connection - ear View Referring to Figure 10.24-5 , from underneath the DUP chassis, release the locking tab and push the Disk Module mounting assembly back (to the rear of the DUP) to disengage the mounting tabs. Remove the Disk Module with the mounting assembly.
Page 520 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.24-5 Disk Unit Package - Exploded View nstall the new Disk Module into the Disk Module mounting assembly and replace the two screws on each side. Slide the Disk Module mounting assembly onto the DUP chassis so the tabs are engaged. Ensure that the locking tab is also engaged.
Page 521 235-105-210 October 1999  Cable ED-3T053-40, G5 to Power Switch  Disk power cable to Disk Module  Fan power cable to fan  -48 V input power cable ED-3T053-15, G17. Referring to Figure 10.24-5 , remove the four screws holding the Power Supply (CGG2) to the power board bracket.
Page 522 235-105-210 October 1999 At the Power Switch, install the scan/alarm cable ED-3T053-40, G5 and G6 to the Power Switch connector. At the Power Supply (CGG2), install the following cables to the connectors on the Power Supply:  Cable ED-3T053-40, G5 to Power Switch ...
Page 523 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 10.24-6 Top View of DUP (Showing Internal Cabling) Copyright © 1999 Page 9...
Page 524 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 10.25: VE IFY SM DISK FILES WITH OFF-LINE BOOT P OCEDU E Refer to Off-Line Boot Procedure in System Recovery 235-105-250. Copyright © 1999 Page 1...
Page 525 235-105-210 October 1999 11. MISCELLANEOUS OUTINE P OCEDU ES General ® This section contains detailed procedures that apply throughout the ESS -2000 switch and are not covered in other sections. All activation procedures are located in Section 14 and Section 15 . Copyright ©...
Page 526 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.1: SELECT AND P EPA E TE MINAL FO C/V ACTIVITIES P OCEDU E s master control center (MCC) or recent change and verify (RC/V) terminal to be used? f MCC, continue with Step 2. f C/V, proceed to Step 9. At MCC, place terminal into command mode.
Page 527 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.2: ECO D ANNOUNCEMENTS USING HANDSET 13A ECO DED ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM P OCEDU E At 13A recorded announcement unit (13A unit) front panel, connect handset (G3DR-61 or equivalent) to HAND SET jack on front panel. See Figure 11.2-1 . At 13A unit, select message module to be recorded.
Page 528 235-105-210 October 1999 s recorded announcement of satisfactory quality? f YES, continue with Step 15. f NO, seek technical assistance. s selected message module UD4 or UD6 type? f YES, continue with Step 16. f NO, do Step 17. At selected message module, adjust MESS. LENGTH ADJ. switch for minimum silence between end and beginning of recorded announcement.
Page 529 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 11.2-1 13A ecorded Announcement System - Message Modules STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 3...
Page 530 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.3: ECO D ANNOUNCEMENTS USING TAPE 13A ECO DED ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM P OCEDU E At 13A recorded announcement unit (13A unit) front panel, connect tape recorder to TAPE jack with patch cord. See Figure 11.2-1 . Note: Length of recorded announcement must be within the maximum time established per message module (24 seconds for UD4 and 12 seconds for UD5 and UD6).
Page 531 235-105-210 October 1999 Check tape recorder output. At UD3 or UD3B circuit pack, depress ECO D switch. See Figure 11.2-1 . Red EQUEST ECO D LED lights. Response: Using tape recorder, start repeat recording immediately when green ECO D LED lights. Note: Recording period is over when green ECO D LED goes out.
Page 532 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.4: OSPS INTE FLOW MAINTENANCE B-CHANNEL LOOPBACK TEST OVE VIEW This procedure provides for B-channel loopback testing between two integrated services digital network ( SDN) switching modules (SMs). This test is part of the Operator Services Position System (OSPS) interflow maintenance capability.
Page 533 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify that when the current traffic busy condition on the specified B-channel is removed, the B-channel is seized and the test results are reported on the ROP, and the B-channel is returned to its previous state once the automatic test has completed.
Page 534 235-105-210 October 1999 ® Procedure 11.5: CONVE SION P OCEDU E TO ANS STANDA D U LINE CA DS OVE VIEW CAUTION: While conversion is in progress the subscriber's line will be out of service. ® Steps 1 through 38 are procedures for converting an AM U or T line card to an ANSI standard U line card.
Page 535 235-105-210 October 1999 ® Change the BR TYPE (5E6-field 17) to ANSI Null (tick) out the DP DB (5E6-field 24). Null (tick) out the TS (5E6-field 25). Null (tick) out the QTR TS (5E6-field 26). ® (optional) Change the PM GRP (5E6-field 18) to the appropriate group for an ANSI U line card.
Page 536 235-105-210 October 1999 Record the line assignment and then delete the line assignment on the ``spare'' card. f the ``spare'' line card type matches the line card type needed, go to Step 27. f not, degrow the ``spare'' line card. Grow in the line card type needed in the same slot using View 22.7 and make the line card state operational (refer to 235-105-231, Hardware Change Procedures Growth).
Page 537 235-105-210 October 1999 ® Through View 23.2, assign the TN and appropriate features to the ANSI U line card. The office equipment number will be the same as that used by the Z line card. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright ©...
Page 538 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.6: PE FO M CONVE SION F OM ACD/OSPS ISLU TO E ISLU OVE VIEW These procedures provide the steps necessary to convert an automatic call distribution (ACD) Operator Service Position System (OSPS) based remote integrated services line unit (R SLU) (or ACD/OSPS R SLU), to an enhanced R SLU (ER SLU).
Page 539 235-105-210 October 1999 maximum number (144) of ACD/OSPS positions is assigned to the ACD/OSPS R SLU] from the DF facilities perspective. f the ACD/OSPS R SLU's DF mode is FE (DF MODE field of RC/V view 22.9), then Section 11.6.2.6 (PSU P DB considerations) must be consulted prior to the conversion.
Page 540 235-105-210 October 1999 200 (max) a 192 (max) Notes: The maximum number of ACD/OSPS positions per SM is 200. 11.6.2.2 SP OSPS CD Configuration The host SM does not allocate time slots (24 per facility) to the spare facility of an ACD/OSPS R SLU. After the conversion, however, the spare facility will require time slots, as it will be made active.
Page 541 235-105-210 October 1999 after the conversion, with the diverse SDN traffic, the use of four quarter time slots on a 56 Kbps facility cannot be supported since study has shown that retransmission would happen on almost every transmitted frame. This change impacts the usage and allocation of PS UP DB time slots and results in the reduction of the number of ACD/OSPS positions supported per PSU shelf after the conversion.
Page 542 235-105-210 October 1999 For R SLU using DF with FE mode, the maximum number of ports per PSU shelf is 96. This number includes all packet switch ports beside ACD/OSPS positions.  dentify time slots which are currently assigned to the R SLU by reviewing RC/V 22.19 where LU field indicates the R SLU unit number to be converted.
Page 543 235-105-210 October 1999  Verify that RLtscount.rislu_Xp (where X is the shelf number) is less than 32. For 5E10 and later releases:  Verify that (PS UP DB.shts_diX - PS UP DB.rpa_ts) is less than 32 (where X is the D (0 or 1) number from RC/V 22.9).
Page 544 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, enter the following message: OP:OFFNO M,SM=x; CMD: Where: x = SM number. NOTE: Evaluate system response to determine if system status is acceptable to continue. Specific attention is required for areas that can cause SM isolation or service impact during this ACD/OSPS R SLU conversion procedure.
Page 545 235-105-210 October 1999 11.6.5 emove all Equipped DFI-H1s and DFI-H2s from Service At MCC, enter the following message: CMD: MV:DFIH=x-y-z,ucl; Where: x = SM number y = DLTU number z = DF H number. CAUTION: With all DF -H1s and DF -H2s removed from service, the ACD/OSPS R SLU is duplex failed. This will result in loss of call processing on the ACD/OSPS R SLU under conversion.
Page 546 OOS DF -Hs back to service (to bring the R SLU back to the preconversion status) then contact the appropriate Lucent Technologies Customer Support organization. f after the SM full initialization and all R SLU circuits (DF -RH, CC CD) are OOS and cannot be restored individually, or calls cannot be completed, seek technical assistance.
Page 547 235-105-210 October 1999 MV:DFIH=x-y-z,ucl; CMD: Where: x = SM number y = DLTU number z = DF H number At the MCC, enter the following message: ST:DFIH=x-y-z; CMD: Where: x = SM number y = DLTU number z = DF H number NOTE: Repeat command to diagnose all the equipped DF -Hs on the newly converted ER SLU.
Page 548 235-105-210 October 1999 11.6.11.1 Verify Call Processing Verify call-processing operation of the converted ER SLU by routing a call through one of the ER SLU ACD/OSPS positions to ensure that the call can be set up and taken down. 11.6.11.2 Verify the emote Alarm Section ( AS) In-Service Status (if Equipped) At MCC, enter the following poke: 1420,sZ Poke:...
Page 549 The digital service unit-2 (DSU2) integrated services test function ( STF) and global digital services function (GDSF) provides a 5ESS-2000 switch integrated services digital network ( SDN) peripheral unit support for transmission testing of interoffice digital trunks and basic-rate interfaces through the use of a pseudo-random number (PRN) bit pattern.
Page 550 235-105-210 October 1999 P OCEDU E For STF/GDSF loopback function feature implementation, go to Step 2. For STF/GDSF transmit function feature implementation, go to Step 9. For verifying feature implementation, go to Step 14. STF/GDSF Loopback Feature mplementation The recent changes required to implement the inverting and noninverting loopback function of this feature are described as follows.
Page 551 235-105-210 October 1999  TGN = (The Loopback Trunk Group)  S G PRO = TRAD. Use recent change view 1.5 (PBX-D D L NE) to insert the telephone number that will be associated with the noninverting option. The significant attributes and their respective values are as follows: ...
Page 552 235-105-210 October 1999  TGN = (The transmit trunk group)  MEMB NBR = 0  QTY = 1  EN = P XXXXXXXX (where X is the logical port). Define the fixed route on recent change view 10.1 (F XED ROUTE). The significant attributes and their respective values are as follows: ...
Page 553 235-105-210 October 1999 4401,X CMD: Where: X = (directory number of inverting test line). At TLWS, access Page 5000,2 (TRANSM SS ON). To specify digital trunk loopback testing, enter the following poke: 5033,X,Y CMD: Where: X = LBK NV (Termination type) Y = BLKSZ (Data block size, 1-64000).
Page 554 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.8: DUMP AMA BLOCK TO ECEIVE-ONLY P INTE OVE VIEW This procedure explains how to dump the three disk blocks, corresponding to a given AMA block, to the receive-only printer (ROP). (At the point where the sequence number is found, the OP:AMA:SEQ,BLK=x; can be used to output the contents of the AMA sequence number block.
Page 555 235-105-210 October 1999 First primary sequence (FPS) number. Last primary sequence (LPS) number. First secondary offset (FSO). Last secondary offset (LSO). First secondary sequence (FSS) number. Last secondary sequence (LSS) number. First block offset (FBO). Last block offset (LBO). First block sequence (FBS) number. Last block sequence (LBS) number.
Page 556 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE 2: This partition has no wraparound of primary data, and the FPO=6; therefore, the simplified calculations mentioned in Step 5, Note 2, do apply: The following equation will apply to primary data on a partition which has primary data with no wraparound of primary data, and an FPO value of 6.
Page 557 235-105-210 October 1999 d = Segment number (32 partitions per segment). e = Total number of segments. f = Disk logical partition number. g = Starting disk block number of the indicated partition. h = Ending (inclusive) disk block number of the indicated partition. i = Size, in 512-byte blocks, of the indicated partition.
Page 558 235-105-210 October 1999 k = ndicates the modifier(s) applied to the specific partition definition. Record the starting disk block number (STA T) for PTN 41. This is the even partition. Go to Step 12. f the number PART is even, perform the following calculations: MHDX = PART + 1 MHDY = PART At MCC, type and enter the following two commands, using MHDX in one and MHDY in the other:...
Page 559 235-105-210 October 1999 DUMP:MHD=a:BLOCK=b&&c,DEST= OP; a = MHDX or MHDY from Step 10 or 11. Where: b = TOTOFFSET1 from Step 12. c = TOTOFFSET2 from Step 12. DUMP MHD a BLOCK STA TED Response: DATA FO DISK BLOCK d DUMP MHD a BLOCK COMPLETED a = MHD Member number (0 through 255).
Page 560 235-105-210 October 1999 BN2 = BN + 2 = 1800 ]. (Steps 9, 10, and 11) Following is the information about the volume table of contents (VTOC). (Since this is partition 0, the corresponding MHDs are MHD 0 and MHD 1). Using the even MHD=0, look at the output for partition 41 in the response of the following input message: DUMP:MHD=0:VTOC;...
Page 561 235-105-210 October 1999 (Step 5, Note 2) This partition has no wraparound of primary data, but the FPO = 36, which is not equal to 6; therefore, the simplified calculations mentioned in Step 5, Note 2, do not apply. (Steps 9, 10, and 11) Following is the information about the volume table of contents (VTOC). (Since this is partition 0, the corresponding MHDs are MHD 0 and MHD 1).
Page 562 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.9: DEG OW IDCU FACILITY 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Degrow DCU Facility Degrowth 5E10 and Later 11.9.1 Prepare Integrated Digital Carrier Unit (IDCU) Facilities for Degrowth This procedure assumes that all of the ports associated with a PUB43801 integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) facility are unassigned or that the remote terminal (RT) connected to the facility has been degrown.
Page 563 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. BKUP ODD COMPLETED Responses: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 564 235-105-210 October 1999 MV IFAC a b c COMPLETED Response: Repeat Step 1 for each FAC being deleted. 11.9.5 Verify IFACS to be Degrown are OOS At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1870,y,x Where: DCU number SM number 11.9.6 Delete IFAC Data from Data Base Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify activities.
Page 565 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter D Response: deleting ..FO M DELETED FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed with KEY attributes blank. Continue this procedure at Step 23. Type and enter U Response: FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the completed work order Form 20.23 indicating what facilities are to be deleted, type and enter the indicated values for the following KEY attributes: KEY ATTRIBUTES:...
Page 566 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter ' Response: Cursor at PUB43801 attribute of an FAC. Type and enter ' IFAC: Response: For each remaining FAC to be degrown on this LS , execute Steps 13 through 18. When no FACs remain to be grown, continue with Step 20.
Page 567 235-105-210 October 1999 1. SM ___ Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-Insert, Validate, Screen#, or Print: f all facilities on an LS were deleted, FO M NOT FOUND will be returned. Otherwise, verify that data is consistent with work order Form 20.23. Comment: Correct any errors using terminal in the update mode.
Page 568 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable. BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.9.12 eturn Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Message Printing from Backup OVE VIEW NOTE: Wait 30 minutes before performing the following steps, and monitor the ROP output for ANALYS S ONLY, REPT TRBL, and PFR messages that may implicate this new hardware or associated hardware.
Page 569 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.10: G OW IDCU FACILITY 5E10 AND LATE OVE VIEW The integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) common hardware and the associated loop-side interface (LS ) must be operational before the DCU Facilities ( FAC) may be grown in. P OCEDU E Grow DCU Facility Growth 5E10 and Later...
Page 570 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.10.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Messages to Be Printed At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL, TOBKUP...
Page 571 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order Form 20.23 as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. KEY ATTRIBUTES: 1. SM 2. IDCU 3. LSI What is cursor response? f positioned at the first FAC EQSTAT attribute, then go to Step 9.
Page 572 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter IFAC or field number. IFAC: Response: Type and enter the row number of an FAC being grown. Response: Cursor at EQSTAT attribute of an FAC. Type and enter G Response: Cursor at PM GRP attribute of an FAC. Type and enter data from the service order.
Page 573 235-105-210 October 1999 11.10.4 Verify IFAC Data At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 23 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for the following KEY attributes: KEY ATTRIBUTES: 1.
Page 574 235-105-210 October 1999 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.23 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter U FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order Form 20.23 as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute.
Page 575 235-105-210 October 1999 Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Response: Cursor at PUB43801 attribute of an FAC. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. IFAC: Response: For each remaining FAC to be grown on this LS , execute Steps 6 through 11. When no FACs remain to be grown, then continue with next Step.
Page 576 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-Insert, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Verify data is consistent with the work order form. Comment: Correct errors using terminal in the update mode. Type and enter q FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Response: Type and enter <...
Page 577 235-105-210 October 1999 1870,y,x Where: DCU number SM number. Verify that the added FACs are active with no carrier group alarms present. 11.10.13 eturn Peripheral Fault ecovery Message Printing from Backup NOTE: Wait 30 minutes before performing the following steps, and monitor the ROP output for ANALYS S ONLY, REPT TRBL, and PFR messages that may implicate this new hardware or associated hardware.
Page 578 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: SM inhibited. esponse: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 10...
Page 579 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.11: DELETE IDCU FACILITY ASSIGNED TO T 303 T 5E10 AND LATE OVE VIEW All terminal assignments (lines and trunks) which are assigned to a ntegrated Digital Carrier Unit ( DCU) facility must be removed from the facility before deleting facility from the TR303 remote terminal (RT). The facilities which carry the embedded operations channel (EOC) and time-slot management channel (TMC) data links to the TR303 RT may not be deleted.
Page 580 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 581 235-105-210 October 1999 SM number DCU number FAC number. esponse: MV IFAC a b c COMPLETED Repeat Step 1 for each FAC assignment to be deleted. 11.11.4 Verify IFACs To Be Degrown from the T 303 T Are OOS At MCC, type and enter 1880,x,y,z Where: DCU number...
Page 582 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter C Change Field: Response: Type and enter For 5E11 or earlier: TIFACT M or field number. For 5E12 or later: TFACT M or field number. TFACT M: ow: Response: Type and enter For 5E11 or earlier: TIFACT M or field number. For 5E12 or later: TFACT M or field number.
Page 583 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. KEY ATTRIBUTES: 1.
Page 584 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, ,go to Step 8. Type and enter D FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order Form 20.23 as a guide for the facilities that are to be deleted from the TR303 RT, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute.
Page 585 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter IFAC or field number. IFAC: ow: Response: Type and enter the row number of an FAC being degrown. Response: Cursor at EQSTAT attribute of an FAC. Type and enter ' Response: Cursor at PM GRP attribute of an FAC. Type and enter ' Response: Cursor at FAC L TY D attribute of an FAC.
Page 586 235-105-210 October 1999 11.11.8 Verify IFAC Data At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.23 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Response: Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. KEY ATTRIBUTES: 1.
Page 587 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter 1880,x,y,z Where: DCU number RT number SM number. Verify that the deleted FACs are not displayed. 11.11.12 eturn Peripheral Fault ecovery Message Printing from Backup NOTE: Wait 30 minutes before performing the following steps, and monitor the ROP output for ANALYS S ONLY, REPT TRBL, and PFR messages that may implicate this new hardware or associated hardware.
Page 588 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.11.14 eturn outine Exercise to Normal At MCC, type and enter the following command: ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: a = SM inhibited. Response: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright ©...
Page 589 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.12: ASSIGN IDCU FACILITY TO T 303 T 5E10 AND LATE OVE VIEW The integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) common hardware and the associated loop-side interface (LS ) must be operational before the DCU facilities ( FAC) may be grown in. The TR303 remote terminal (RT) must be operational, and the FACs to be assigned to the TR303 RT must be in the G OW state before performing this procedure.
Page 590 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communications module processor (CMP), if applicable. BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.12.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Messages to Be Printed At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL, TOBKUP...
Page 591 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order Form 20.23 as a guide for the facilities that are to be assigned to the TR303 RT, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. KEY ATTRIBUTES: 1.
Page 592 235-105-210 October 1999 IFAC: Response: For each remaining FAC to be grown on this LS , repeat Steps 7 through 12. When no more FACs remain to be grown, continue with next Step. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Change Field: Response: Hit CARR AGE RETURN.
Page 593 235-105-210 October 1999 Comment: Correct errors using terminal in the update mode. Type and enter q FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Response: Type and enter < 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q Response: CV-196 COMPLETED 11.12.5 Update IFACs To Operational On Other LSI f required, repeat Sections 11.12.3 and 11.12.4 to update and verify the FACs to operational that are...
Page 594 Verify RT vendor documentation for correct facility assignment and EOC/TMC backup designation. For ® Lucent Technologies SLC Series 5 FP303G, the EOC/TMC backup designation must be on RT TERM 3. For each remaining FAC to be added to this RT, repeat Steps 6 and 7. When no more FACs remain to be added, continue with next Step.
Page 595 235-105-210 October 1999 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 15 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. KEY ATTRIBUTES: 1.
Page 596 235-105-210 October 1999 ST:IFAC=a-b-c; Where: SM number DCU number FAC number. esponse: ST IFAC a b c COMPLETED Repeat Step 1 for each FAC assigned to the TR303 RT. 11.12.11 Verify IFAC Growth on MCC Page At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1880,y,z,x Where: DCU number...
Page 597 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: 11.12.13 Back Up Office-Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 598 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.13: DEG OW IDCU T 303 T 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Degrow DCU TR303 RT 5E10 and Later 11.13.1 Prepare Integrated Digital Carrier Unit (IDCU) T 303 T for Degrowth by Updating elation C_HOLE Prior to emoving All Terminal Assignments OVE VIEW NOTE: The values of some fileds will vary, depending on whether the RC_HOLE relation has tuples populated or not.
Page 599 235-105-210 October 1999 Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Response: ACC_HASH acc_rid = 1820 acc_oflg = 0 acc_foldtype = DBDEFAULT acc_probdepth = 3 acc_tpag = 0 rel_dsze = 256 acc_npag = 0 0 0 0 0 acc_totp = 0 rel_tmax = 200 There are 0 pages of overflow elation ' C_HOLE' is empty, but you may still modify its access dictionary.
Page 600 235-105-210 October 1999 rel_dsze = 256 Response: Data page size (rel_dsze) (<C > keeps default)? Type and enter 1024 Response: rel_tmax = 200 Maximum number of tuples (rel_tmax) (<C > keeps default)? Type and enter 5000 After EO G, the new access dictionary will be the following. Response: ACCDICT acc_rid = 1820...
Page 601 235-105-210 October 1999 ACCDICT acc_rid = 1820 acc_head = 0 acc_rcnt = 0 acc_wflg = 0 acc_grbg = 0 (5E12 and later) acc_state = ACCU acc_nidix = 0 acc_bidx = 0 rel_hsze = 1024 Hit <C > to see access method specific dictionary Hit CARR AGE RETURN.
Page 602 235-105-210 October 1999 CV MENU ACCED COMPLETED Response: 11.13.2 emove Terminal Assignments from emote Terminal Remove all terminal assignments (lines and/or trunks) from the remote terminal being degrown. 11.13.3 Verify and Set Initial Conditions At master control center (MCC), observe Summary Status Area for a SYS NORM indication. f a SYS NORM indication is not obtained, type and enter the following command: OP:SYSSTAT;...
Page 603 235-105-210 October 1999 11.13.4 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Messages to be Printed At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL, TOBKUP Response: OK with exceptions At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=pfr_mon,P INT=ON,LOG=OFF; esponse: At MCC, type and enter the following command: SET:PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE;...
Page 604 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1870,y,x Where: y = DCU number x = SM number. Response: FAC page is displayed. 11.13.7 Verify IFACs That Are Associated with the T 303 T Being Degrown are OOS At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1880,y,z,x Where:...
Page 605 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify data. Type and enter D deleting ..FO M DELETED Response: EMOTE TE MINAL VIEW page displayed with attributes blank. Type and enter < 18.0 SM AND EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: 11.13.9 Delete Unused IFACs from Data Base At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.23 Enter Data Base Operation Response:...
Page 606 235-105-210 October 1999 Go to Step 22. Type and enter U Response: FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form 20.23 as a guide for the facilities that are to deleted, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute.
Page 607 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter ' IFAC: Response: For each remaining FAC to be degrown on this LS , repeat Steps 12 through 17. When no more FACs remain to be degrown, continue with next Step. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Response: Change Field: Hit CARR AGE RETURN.
Page 608 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: y = DCU number x = SM number. Verify that deleted FACs are not displayed. 11.13.12 Back Up Office Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE 1: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if required.
Page 609 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 12...
Page 610 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.14: G OW IDCU T 303 T 5E10 AND LATE OVE VIEW CAUTION: This procedure is not to be performed unless the Remote Terminal (RT) is physically turned up. Prerequisite Conditions The integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) common hardware, associated loop-side interface (LS ), and electrical line interface (EL ) must be operational.
Page 611 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: At MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH; esponse: The inhibit status will be printed. Verify this printout. At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable.
Page 612 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1870,y,x Where: DCU number SM number. Verify that the FACs associated with the growth TR303 RT are in the Growth State. 11.14.4 Update IFACs from Grow to Operational Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify activities. eference: Procedure 11.1 Type and enter 20.23...
Page 613 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Cursor at FAC L TY D attribute of an FAC. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. esponse: Cursor at SUP MTHD attribute of an FAC. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. esponse: Cursor at PUB43801 attribute of an FAC. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. esponse: IFAC: For each remaining FAC to be grown on this LS , execute Steps 6 through 12.
Page 614 EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. NOTE 1: Verify RT vendor documentation for correct facility assignment and EOC/TMC backup designation. ® For example, the Lucent Technologies SLC Series 5 FP303G EOC/TMC backup designation must be on RT TERM 3. ®...
Page 615 NOTE 1: The RT_L NE_S ZE field should specify the remote terminal vendor's maximum line size ® supported. For example, the Lucent Technologies SLC Series 2000 FP303G RT supports a maximum line size of 768, therefore RT_L NE_S ZE is 768.
Page 616 Type and enter EOCNP I or field number. Response: Cursor at EOC NPR ( SCN) NOTE: Verify RT vendor documentation for correct EOC backup designation. ® For example, the Lucent Technologies SLC Series 5 FP303G EOC backup designation must be on RT TERM 3. ® The SLC Series 2000 FP303G EOC the backup designation must be on RT TERM 2.
Page 617 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter EOC NPR attributes SCN, DP DB, and T ME SLOT Change Field: Response: Are the same protocol handler assignments used for the previous entries in Steps 8,10,12 and 14? NOTE 1: To improve reliability, it is recommended, but not required, that the TMC/EOC PR and NPR be assigned over different protocol handlers (PH).
Page 618 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the selected work order form as a guide, again type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute listed in the following display. ATTRIBUTES: 1. SM UNIT TYPE IDCU 3. UNIT NUMBER _ 4. RT EX esponse: System completes remainder of view.
Page 619 235-105-210 October 1999 DCU number FAC number. esponse: ST IFAC a b c COMPLETED Repeat Step 1 for each FAC associated with the grown TR303 RT. 11.14.13 Verify That T 303 T Has No Alarms Present At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1880,y,z,x Where: DCU number...
Page 620 235-105-210 October 1999 continue with the following steps. At MCC, type and enter the following command: ALW:B EVC,SM=a; Where: SM number. esponse: At MCC, type and enter the following command: CL :PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE; Where: SM number. At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS:MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP;...
Page 621 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.15: DEG OW IDCU T 008 T 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Degrow DCU TR008 RT 5E10 and later 11.15.1 Prepare Integrated Digital Carrier Unit (IDCU) T 008 T for Degrowth This procedure assumes that all terminal assignments (line and/or trunks) have been removed from the remote terminal before degrowth occurs.
Page 622 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.15.3 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Messages To Be Printed At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL, TOBKUP...
Page 623 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: MV IFACILITY a b c COMPLETED 11.15.5 Verify IFACs Associated with the T 008 T Being Degrown Are OOS At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1880,y,z,x Where: DCU number RT number SM number. 11.15.6 Inhibit Protection Line Switching NOTE 1: Protection line switching, if provided, should be inhibited on all FACs associated with the RT that is being degrown.
Page 624 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter Delete, Change, Validate, Screen #, or Print: Verify data. Type and enter D deleting ..FO M DELETED Response: EMOTE TE MINAL VIEW page displayed with attributes blank.
Page 625 235-105-210 October 1999 Continue this procedure at Step 24. Type and enter U FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Select the completed work order Form 20.23 indicating what facilities are to be deleted. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: 1.
Page 626 235-105-210 October 1999 Field 4: ow: Response: For each remaining FAC to be degrown on this LS , execute Steps 14 through 20. When no FACs remain to be degrown, continue this procedure with Step 21. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Change Field: Response: Hit CARR AGE RETURN.
Page 627 235-105-210 October 1999 DCU number SM number. Verify that deleted FACs are not displayed. 11.15.11 Back Up Office-Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable.
Page 628 235-105-210 October 1999 SM inhibited. esponse: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 8...
Page 629 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.16: G OW IDCU T 008 T 5E10 AND LATE OVE VIEW The integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) common hardware and the associated loop-side interface (LS ) and electrical line interface (EL ) must be operational, and the DCU facilities ( FAC), which are to be associated with the growth TR008 remote terminal (RT), must be in the G OW state (per Procedure 11.10 ).
Page 630 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.16.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Messages To Be Printed At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL, TOBKUP...
Page 631 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Select the completed work order Form 20.23 for the identified SM. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: 1.
Page 632 235-105-210 October 1999 For each remaining FAC to be grown on this LS , execute Steps 7 through 13. When no FACs remain to be grown, continue this procedure at Step 15. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating ..FO M UPDATED...
Page 633 235-105-210 October 1999 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.16.5 Update IFACs On Other LSI f required, repeat Sections 11.16.3 and 11.16.4 for the FACs being updated to operational on the other LS .
Page 634 235-105-210 October 1999 EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: 11.16.8 Update T 008 T from Grow to Operational At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 18.15 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter U...
Page 635 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U updating ..FO M UPDATED Response: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: 11.16.9 Verify T 008 T Data At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 15 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete:...
Page 636 235-105-210 October 1999 11.16.10 estore IFACs to Service At MCC, type and enter the following command: ST:IFAC=a-b-c; Where: SM number DCU number FAC number. esponse: ST IFAC a b c COMPLETED Repeat Step 1 for each FAC associated with the grown TR008 RT. 11.16.11 Verify T Growth on MCC Pages At MCC or trunk and line work station, type and enter the following command, 1880,y,z,x...
Page 637 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS:MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP; esponse: 11.16.13 Back Up Office-Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable.
Page 638 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.17: CONVE T IDCU T 008 T FEATU E PACKAGE B MODE 1 O 2 TO T 303 T 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Convert DCU TR008 RT Feature Package B Mode 1 OR 2 to TR303 RT 5E10 and Later 11.17.1 Prepare IDCU T 008 T for Conversion ...
Page 639 235-105-210 October 1999 routine exercise (REX) is inhibited, it must be allowed at the conclusion of this conversion procedure. At MCC, type and enter the following command: INH: EX,SM=a Where: Number of the SM converting the DCU RT. esponse: At MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH esponse: The inhibit status will be printed.
Page 640 235-105-210 October 1999 INH:B EVC,SM=a Where: SM number. esponse: 11.17.4 Identify IFACs Associated with the T 008 T Conversion At MCC or trunk and line work station (TLWS), type and enter the following command: 1870,y,x Where: DCU number. SM number. dentify FACs associated with the TR008 RT conversion on the MCC page.
Page 641 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify that the FACs associated with the TR008 RT being converted have been removed from service. 11.17.7 Update T 008 T to T 303 T Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify activities. Procedure 11.1 Reference: At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 18.15 Response:...
Page 642 Response: NOTE: Verify RT vendor documentation for correct facility assignment and EOC/TMC backup designation. For Lucent Technologies SLC Series 5 FP303G, the EOC/TMC backup designation must be on RT TERM 3. Continue entering the remaining TMC and EOC attributes from the work order form. When all the fields have been entered, continue with Step 21.
Page 643 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U updating ..FO M UPDATED Response: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at the SM attribute. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: 11.17.8 Verify T 303 T Data At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 15 Enter Data Base Operation Response:...
Page 644 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 15 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter U EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Using the selected work order form as a guide, again type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute.
Page 645 Verify that the RT is displayed properly. 11.17.12 Change T Hardware f converting Lucent Technologies TR008 RT feature package B Mode 1 or 2 to TR303 RT, perform the RT Hardware Change portion of 363-205-401,NTP-010. f converting a non Lucent Technologies RT, perform the vendor's procedure.
Page 646 Verify that the facility has restored on the MCC page. Verify RT hardware integrity:  f converting Lucent Technologies TR008 RT feature package B Mode 1 or 2 to TR303 RT, as FAC is restored, perform the portion of 363-205-401, NTP-010 to verify Hardware ntegrity. ...
Page 647 October 1999 11.17.16 Perform Verification Testing of the T 303 T f converting Lucent Technologies TR008 RT feature package B Mode 1 or 2 to TR303 RT, perform the portion of 363-205-401, NTP-010 that performs Verification Testing of the RT.
Page 648 235-105-210 October 1999 UNIT TYPE IDCU 3. UNIT NUMBER _ 4. RT EX Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute for the TR008 RT. Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter C Response:...
Page 649 CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.17.21 Change T Hardware f reinstating Lucent Technologies TR008 RT feature package B Mode 1 or 2, perform the Change RT Hardware section in NTP-011 of 363-205-401. f reinstating a non Lucent Technologies RT, perform the vendor's procedure.
Page 650 Repeat Steps 1 through 3, restoring the remaining FACs in ascending order. 11.17.24 Perform Verification Testing of the T 008 T f reinstating Lucent Technologies TR008 RT feature package B Mode 1 or 2, perform the portion of NTP-011 of 363-205-401 that performs Verification Testing of the RT.
Page 651 235-105-210 October 1999 I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter U EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Select the completed work order Form 18.15 for the identified TR008 RT. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display.
Page 652 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.17.27 Back Up Office Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for the SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable.
Page 653 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 16...
Page 654 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.18: ADD IFAC TO T 008 T DIG OUPS 5E10 AND LATE OVE VIEW The integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) common hardware, the associated loop-side interfaces (LS ), and the associated electrical-line interface (EL ) must be operational. The DCU facilities ( FAC), which are to be associated with the additional TR008 remote terminal (RT) digroups, must be in the growth state (per Procedure 11.10 ).
Page 655 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses from the SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 656 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Data Base Operation Response: I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter U FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Select the completed work order Form 20.23 indicating what facilities are to be assigned to the added digroup.
Page 657 235-105-210 October 1999 Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Field 4: Response: For each remaining FAC to be updated on this LS , execute Steps 8 through 13. When no FACs remain to be updated, continue this procedure with Step 15. Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Response: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter U...
Page 658 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter < Response: 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.18.6 Update IFACs on Other LSI f required, repeat Sections 11.18.4 and 11.18.5 for FACs assigned to the added digroups on the other LS ]]>...
Page 659 235-105-210 October 1999 If Digroup B is being added as Mode 1, continue this procedure at Step 7. Otherwise, continue this procedure at Step 15. Type and enter 27 Response: Cursor at D GROUP B MODE attribute. Type and enter UNCONC Change Field: Response: Type and enter 28...
Page 660 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: Cursor at D GROUP C EQSTAT attribute. Type and enter G Change Field: Response: Type and enter 33 Response: Cursor at D GROUP C CL attribute. Type and enter information from work order form. Change Field: Response: Type and enter 34 Response:...
Page 661 235-105-210 October 1999 Change Field: Response: Type and enter 38 Response: Cursor at D GROUP D FAC attribute. Type and enter information from work order form. Change Field: Response: If Dual Digroup CD is being added as Mode 2, continue this procedure at Step 34. Otherwise, continue this procedure at Step 48.
Page 662 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter CONC Change Field: Response: Type and enter 36 Response: Cursor at D GROUP D EQSTAT attribute. Type and enter G Change Field: Response: Type and enter 37 Response: Cursor at D GROUP D CL attribute. Type and enter information from work order form.
Page 663 235-105-210 October 1999 Repeat Step 1 for each RT DS1 FAC associated with an added digroup. 11.18.10 At the MCC, Verify that Added Digroups Are in the G OW State At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1880,y,z,x Where: y = DCU number z = RT number x = SM number.
Page 664 235-105-210 October 1999 Cursor at T 008 DIG OUP C EQSTAT attribute. Response: If Digroup C is being added, update EQSTAT from G to O and hit RETURN, else just hit RETURN. Change Field: Response: Type and enter 36 Cursor at T 008 DIG OUP D EQSTAT attribute. Response: If Digroup D is being added, update EQSTAT from G to O and hit RETURN, else just hit RETURN.
Page 665 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-Insert, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Verify data is consistent with the work order form. Comment: Correct errors using terminal in the update mode. Type and enter q Response: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Type and enter <...
Page 666 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: y = DCU number x = SM number. 11.18.16 Uninhibit Protection Line Switching NOTE: f inhibited, allow protection line switching for those RT facilities associated with the added digroups. At MCC, type and enter the following command for each RT FAC terminating an added digroup or dual digroup: ALW: T,FAC=a-b,P OT;...
Page 667 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable. BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.18.19 eturn outine Exercise to Normal At MCC, type and enter the following command: ALW: EX,SM=a;...
Page 668 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.19: DELETE IFAC F OM T 008 T DIG OUPS 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Delete FAC From TR008 RT Digroups 5E10 and Later 11.19.1 Prepare Integrated Digital Carrier Unit (IDCU) T 008 T for Deletion of Digroups This procedure assumes that all line and trunk assignments have been removed from the digroups to be deleted before the deletion occurs.
Page 669 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses from the SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 670 235-105-210 October 1999 RT DS1 FAC (B, C, and/or D). 11.19.5 Unconditionally emove IFACs from Service At MCC, type and enter the following command for each of the FACs which connect the digroups to be degrown to the DCU: MV:IFAC=a-b-c,UCL; Where: SM number DCU number...
Page 671 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP B MODE attribute. Type and enter ' esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 28 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP B EQSTAT attribute. Type and enter ' esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 29 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP B CL attribute.
Page 672 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 34 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP C FAC attribute. Type and enter ' esponse: Change Field: If Digroup D is being deleted, continue with next Step. Otherwise, go to Step 34. Type and enter 35 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP D MODE attribute.
Page 673 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 33 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP C CL attribute. Type and enter ' esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 34 esponse: Cursor at D GROUP C FAC attribute. Type and enter ' esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 35...
Page 674 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 15 esponse: Enter Data Base Operation I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter esponse: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form as a guide, again type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute.
Page 675 235-105-210 October 1999 REPT TRBL, and PFR messages that may implicate this new hardware or associated hardware. f any messages are seen, take appropriate corrective action and wait again. When no messages are seen, continue with the following steps. At MCC, type and enter the following command: ALW:B EVC,SM=a;...
Page 676 235-105-210 October 1999 Copyright © 1999 Page 9...
Page 677 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.20: CONVE T IDCU T 008 T F OM MODE I TO MODE II 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Convert DCU TR008 RT From Mode to Mode 5E10 and Later 11.20.1 Verify and Set Initial Conditions At master control center (MCC), observe Summary Status Area for a SYS NORM indication.
Page 678 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.20.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery (PF ) Messages To Be Printed At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL, TOBKUP Response: OK with exceptions At MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=pfr_mon,P INT=ON,LOG=OFF;...
Page 679 235-105-210 October 1999 11.20.4 Verify that IFACs Which Are Associated with the T 008 T Being Modified Are OOS At MCC, type and enter the following command: 1880,y,z,x Where: y = DCU number z = RT number x = SM number. 11.20.5 Inhibit Protection Line Switching, If Provided, on all IFACs Associated with the T Being Modified NOTE:...
Page 680 235-105-210 October 1999 listed in the following display: 1. SM INPUT APPROPRIATE DATA UNIT TYPE IDCU 3. UNIT NUMBER _ 4. RT EX Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. Response: System completes remainder of view.
Page 681 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter CONC Change Field: Response: Type and enter 35 Response: Cursor at D GROUP D MODE attribute. Type and enter CONC Response: Change Field: Type and enter 38 Response: Cursor at D GROUP D FAC attribute. Type and enter ' Change Field: Response:...
Page 682 235-105-210 October 1999 1. SM INPUT APPROPRIATE DATA UNIT TYPE IDCU 3. UNIT NUMBER _ 4. RT EX Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-Insert, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Verify data is consistent with selected work order form. Comment: Correct errors using terminal in the update mode.
Page 683 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: a = S D number b = RT DS1 FAC number (A-D,P for TR008 RT, and 1-28 for TR303 RT). Response: ALW T FAC = a-b P OT COMPLETED 11.20.11 emove Unused IFACs from the Data Base At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.23 Response: Enter Data Base Operation...
Page 684 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter ' Response: Cursor at SUP MTHD attribute of an FAC. Type and enter ' Response: Cursor at PUB43801 attribute of an FAC. Type and enter ' Field 4: ow: Response: For each remaining FAC to be degrown on this loop-side interface (LS ), do Steps 7 through 12. When no more FACs remain to be removed, continue with next Step.
Page 685 235-105-210 October 1999 attribute. 1. SM INPUT APPROPRIATE DATA 2. IDCU _ 3. LSI Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-Insert, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Verify data is consistent with selected work order form. Comment: Correct errors using terminal in the update mode. f unused FACs were removed on the other DCU LS , then repeat Steps 3 and 4 for those FACs.
Page 686 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP:ODD, NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable. BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.20.16 eturn Peripheral Fault ecovery Message Printing from Backup NOTE: Wait 30 minutes before performing the following steps, and monitor the ROP for ANALYS S ONLY, REPT TRBL, and PFR messages that may implicate this hardware or associated hardware.
Page 687 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.21: CONVE T IDCU T 008 T F OM MODE II TO MODE I 5E10 AND LATE P OCEDU E Convert DCU TR008 RT from MODE to MODE 5E10 and later 11.21.1 Prepare IDCU T 008 T for Conversion The additional integrated digital carrier unit ( DCU) facilities ( FACs) that are to be associated with the TR008 remote terminal (RT) must be in the growth state.
Page 688 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: The inhibit status will be printed. Verify this printout. At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the administrative module (AM), and the communication module processor (CMP), if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 689 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Enter Data Base Operation I=Insert, = eview, U=Update, D=Delete: Type and enter U esponse: FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Select the completed work order form 20.23 for the identified RT. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display.
Page 690 235-105-210 October 1999 Change Field: Response: Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating ..FO M UPDATED Response: FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. f FACs need to be added on the other DCU LS , then repeat Steps 4 through 17 for those FACs. Otherwise, continue with next Step.
Page 691 235-105-210 October 1999 FACILITY EQUIPMENT (IFAC) page displayed. Response: Type and enter < 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.21.6 Perform DS1 Cross Connects Telephone Company function. 11.21.7 emove from Service IFACs Associated with T Being Modified NOTE: f the RT is equipped with protection line switching, remove the FAC associated with the protection (PROT) first.
Page 692 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: INH: T,FAC=a-b,P OT; Where: S D number RT DS1 FAC number (A-D,P for TR008 RT, and 1-28 for TR303 RT). esponse: INH T FAC = a-b P OT COMPLETED 11.21.10 Change T Hardware CAUTION: This step may be service affecting.
Page 693 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter: 23 Response: Cursor at D GROUP A MODE attribute. Type and enter UNCONC Change Field: Response: Type and enter: 27 Response: Cursor at D GROUP B MODE attribute. Type and enter UNCONC Change Field: Response: Type and enter: 30 Response:...
Page 694 235-105-210 October 1999 Change Field: Response: Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating ..FO M UPDATED Response: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: 11.21.12 Verify T 008 T Data At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 15...
Page 695 235-105-210 October 1999 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.21.13 estore IFACs to Service At MCC, type and enter the following command: ST:IFAC=a-b-c; Where: SM number DCU number FAC number. esponse: ST IFAC a b c COMPLETED 11.21.14 Allow Protection Line Switching, If Provided, on All IFACs Associated with the T Being...
Page 696 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.21.17 eturn Peripheral Fault ecovery Message Printing from Backup NOTE: Wait 30 minutes before performing the following steps, and monitor the ROP for ANALYS S ONLY, REPT...
Page 697 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.22: VE IFY OPE ATION OF ALD1 CI CUIT PACK(S) 14A ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM OVE VIEW This procedure verifies the channel output transmission level, if the recommended Bellcore Technical Advisory standard is being used, and/or the audio quality of the announcement(s) of the 14A announcement system ALD1 circuit pack(s).
Page 698 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, go to Step 12. f NO, continue with next Step. Notify office supervision and installation group that selected ALD1 circuit pack output transmission level does NOT meet the Bellcore Technical Advisory standard. Postpone further testing of this ALD1 pack until the error condition is corrected. Go to Step 19.
Page 699 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 11.22-1 ALD1 Circuit Pack - 14A Announcement System Table 11.22-1 ALD1 Circuit Pack - Preferred Output Transmission Levels - 14A Announcement System TMS EADING TYPE OF CONNECTION 600-Ohm Trunk -2 dBm 900-Ohm Trunk -2 dBm 2-Wire Telephone 0 dBm Line Via AWH1 Notes:...
Page 700 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.23: VE IFY OPE ATION OF ALD2 CI CUIT PACK(S) 14A ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM OVE VIEW This procedure verifies the operation of 14A announcement system ALD2 circuit pack(s) by first performing diagnostics followed by a channel output transmission level test, if the recommended Bellcore Technical Advisory standard transmission level is in use, and/or verification of the audio quality of the announcement.
Page 701 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, continue with next Step. f NO, go to Step 20. At ALD2 circuit pack rear panel, connect the TMS directly to pins 20(T) and 50 ( ) on the 940A connector. Verify the TMS is set for the proper trunk circuit impedance, 600-ohm position for 600-ohm trunks or 900-ohm position for 900-ohm trunks.
Page 702 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, go to Step 23. Use handset to monitor at least one cycle of the announcement. Disconnect handset when monitoring is completed. Was recorded announcement of satisfactory quality? f YES, go to Step 31. f NO, go to Step 28. At ALD2 front panel, press the MENU pushbutton repeatedly until LOC MON is displayed, and then press the SELECT pushbutton.
Page 703 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 11.23-1 ALD2 Circuit Pack - 14A Announcement System Table 11.23-1 ALD2 Menu Display Messages - 14A Announcement System MESSAGE COMMENT ADJ LEV Allows adjustment of the output transmission level using a 1 kHz reference tone. CHK SYS When selected, a complete diagnostic test of ALD2 is made.
Page 704 235-105-210 October 1999 being recorded. (Announcement length is 30 seconds maximum.) 30S MON ndicates that the LOCAL MON TOR mode has been selected and the announcement may be monitored from a handset. Table 11.23-2 ALD2 Circuit Pack - Preferred Output Transmission Levels - 14A Announcement System TMS EADING TYPE OF CONNECTION 600-Ohm Trunk...
Page 705 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.24: VE IFY AMA OPE ATION WITH ON-LINE FUNCTIONAL TEST AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure explains how to verify the automatic message accounting (AMA) operation locally from the central office by using an on-line functional test. The functional test is performed by obtaining a report showing the percentage of mass disk storage occupied by primary AMA data at a given time.
Page 706 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP:AMA:MAPS,a; Where: a = ST1 if AMA data goes to the ST1 data stream a = ST2 if AMA data goes to the ST2 data stream. Response: EPT AMA DISK MAPS FO ST EAM a W ITE PA TITION b EAD PA TITION c PA TITION d DISK MAP: FPO: e LPO: f FPS: g LPS: h...
Page 707 235-105-210 October 1999 n the response, look for the value of the write partition. n dual stream, this operation should be performed on both streams. n the write partition found in Step 10, look at and record that partition's value of the LBS. This operation should be performed for both streams if in dual stream.
Page 708 235-105-210 October 1999 correct AMA EBAF record is identified. t may be necessary to look at more than one block if the time stamps for a set of blocks are close together. Seek technical assistance if difficulty is encountered in block identification.
Page 709 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.25: CONVE T CU SYNCH ONIZATION EFE ENCE TO BITS EXTE NAL 5E9(1) and Later OVE VIEW This section describes the procedure to convert a Remote Clock Unit (RCU) synchronization reference from T1 ® source to a Building ntegrated Timing Supply (B TS) source.
Page 710 235-105-210 October 1999 CONVERT RCU SYNCHRON ZAT ON REFERENCE TO B TS EXTERNAL 5E9(1) and Later 11.25.1 Verify and Set Initial Conditions At master control center (MCC), observe Summary Status Area for a SYS NORM indication. f a SYS NORM indication is not obtained, type and enter the following command: OP:SYSSTAT;...
Page 711 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.25.2 Obtain Data Base eferences for Later Use NOTE: A batch review of SRCREF is used as a precautionary measure to recover the relation to its original values should errors occur during the procedure.
Page 712 235-105-210 October 1999 11.25.3 Conditon CU Side 0 for Update To remove RCU Side 0 from service, at MCC (using page 1170,x) type and enter MV: CLK=a-0 esponse: MV CLK=a-0 COMPLETED Where: SM number To Power Down RCU Side 0, at RCU Side 0, press the OFF button. esponse: EPT PW OFF SM=a CLK0 Where:...
Page 713 235-105-210 October 1999 key item 1: rpicb xxxx Where: xxxx = value of rpicb recorded in batch review of RCB_HCB ( 11.25.2 , Step 4) Enter Attribute Name or '>' rcrefuni item 3: rcrefuni = SM REF1 enter new value = SMNOTREF item 4: rpicb1 = old-value...
Page 714 235-105-210 October 1999 item 6: dfi_name = old-value enter new value = Note: old-value is a "don't care" value item 7: ext_ref = DBNO enter new value = DBYES Tuple Rewritten Enter Primary Key key item 1: rcrefuni SM REF2 key item 2: side SM SIDE0 Enter Attribute Name or '>':...
Page 715 235-105-210 October 1999 Return to RC/V main menu. 11.25.6 estore CU Side 0 to Service To restore RCU Side 0 to service, at the MCC (page 1170,x) type and enter ST: CLK=a-0 Where: the SM where the RCU is located. esponse: DGN CLK=a-0 COMPLETED ATP PH 1 DGN CLK=a-0 COMPLETED ATP PH 2...
Page 716 235-105-210 October 1999 REF# EQL# Ref 1 138-354 Ref 2 138-307 Power Up RCU Side 1, at the RCU Side 1, press the ON button. esponse: EPT PW ON SM=a CLK1 Where: the SM where the RCU is located. CAUTION: The personnel using this procedure must be familiar with the usage and operation of the ODBE;...
Page 717 235-105-210 October 1999 Note: old-value is a "don't care" value item 7: ext_ref = DBNO enter new value = DBYES Tuple Rewritten key item 1: rcrefuni Enter Tuple Operation (I,R,U,D,W,BI,BR,BW): Enter Relation Name: Enter Processor Number (1-217): <Cntrl-D> 11.25.9 Verify Data Base Changes for CU Side 1 To verify data base changes, at the RC/V terminal type and enter 20.11v.
Page 718 235-105-210 October 1999 11.25.11 emove and estore External eferences To verify that the reference timing (&) is absent, refer to MCC page 1120,x To remove external reference 1, at the MCC type and enter MV: C EF=a-1 esponse: MV C EF=a-1 COMPLETED Where: SM number To restore external reference 1, at the MCC type and enter...
Page 719 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter ALW: EX,SM=a Where: SM inhibited. esponse: 11.25.13 Back Up Nonredundant Office Dependent Data NOTE: This is OPT ONAL, but recommended. f done, the SM will not have to recover Recent Change if it is to be pumped. To back up the nonredundant office dependent data (NRODD) type and enter BKUP:ODD,N ODD=a;...
Page 720 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.26: EMOVE/ EPLACE EXM-2000 EVEN NLI PADDLEBOA D 5E9(2) & LATE OVE VIEW This procedure is used for removing/replacing an Extended Switching Module-2000 (EXM-2000) even Network Link nterface (NL ) paddleboard which interfaces with the Optical Line nterface (OL ) 16E2 or 16F2 Transmission Rate Converter Unit 2 (TRCU2) pack.
Page 721 235-105-210 October 1999 Note the NL set referenced page for the NL to be removed/replaced. Type and enter page noted in Step 2. Response: DLI/NLI/TMSLNK SET xx page is displayed. Where: xx = NL set number. NOTE: f even NL to be replaced/removed is already in out-of-service (OOS) state, continue with Section 11.26.4 CAUTION: f for any reason the ONTC has a degraded condition, clear the problem(s) first.
Page 722 235-105-210 October 1999 Label (comcode 847004413). NOTE: f replacing the NL paddleboard, remove the electrical Network Control Timing (NCT) link from the NL removed in Section 11.26.5 and connect the electrical NCT link to the replacement paddleboard. Replacement paddleboard code number must be equal to or greater than the minimum code and series specified on the paddleboard being replaced.
Page 723 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.27: PE FO M EXM-2000 ETS CONNECTION 5E9(2) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure provides the necessary steps to connect an External Timing Source (ETS) via a T1 interface to the Time Slot nterchange Unit 4 (TS U4) of an Extended Switching Module-2000 (EXM-2000). One such appropriate ETS would be the Building ntegrated Timing Supply (B TS) Clock.
Page 724 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: MCTSI page displayed. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: MV:MCTSI=a-0 Where: SM-2000 number. esponse: MV MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED 11.27.4 Inhibit Interrupts At the MCC, inhibit hardware checks by typing and entering the following command: INH:HDWCHK,MCTSI=a-0,ALL Where: a = SM-2000 number.
Page 725 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCTS side 0 (SN516), depress the ON button. EPT PW ON MCTSI=a-0 Response: Where: a = SM-2000 number. 11.27.9 Update the Time Slot Interchange Common (TSICOM) Board Change Level Indicator (CLI) Value for MCTSI Side 0 Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify activities.
Page 726 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 3 Response: Change field: Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM &...
Page 727 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, allow hardware checks by typing and entering the following command: ALW:HDWCHK,MCTSI=a-0,ALL Where: a = SM-2000 number ALW HDWCHK MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: 11.27.14 emove MCTSI Side 1 from Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command: MV:MCTSI=a-1 Where: a = SM-2000 number.
Page 728 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT PW ON MCTSI=a-1 Response: Where: a = SM-2000 number. 11.27.19 Update the Time Slot Interchange Common (TSICOM) Board Change Level Indicator (CLI) Value for MCTSI Side 1 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 18.1 Enter Database Operation Response: I=Insert = eview U=Update D=Delete: Type and enter U...
Page 729 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.27.20 Diagnose Side 1 External eference At the MCC, type and enter:...
Page 730 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.28: PE FO M EXM-2000 ETS DISCONNECTION 5E9(2) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure provides the necessary steps to disconnect an External Timing Source (ETS) via a T1 interface to the Time Slot nterchange Unit 4 (TS U4) of an Extended Switching Module-2000 (EXM-2000). One such appropriate ETS would be the Building ntegrated Timing Supply (B TS) Clock.
Page 731 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: a = SM-2000 number. MV MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: 11.28.4 Inhibit Interrupts At the MCC, inhibit hardware checks by typing and entering the following command: INH:HDWCHK,MCTSI=a-0,ALL Where: a = SM-2000 number. INH HDWCHK MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: 11.28.5 Power Down MCTSI Side 0 At MCTS side 0 (SN516), simultaneously depress the Manual OverRide (MOR) and OFF button.
Page 732 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Database Operation Response: I=Insert = eview U=Update D=Delete: Type and enter U SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Response: Cursor at SM attribute. Select the completed Growth RCV (GRCV) form 18.1, for the identified SM-2000. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: *1.
Page 733 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.28.9 Diagnose the Side 0 External eference At the MCC, type and enter: DGN:MCTSI=a-0,ph=33&&36 Where: a = SM-2000 number DGN MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED ATP Response: 11.28.10 Unconditionally estore MCTSI Side 0 to Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command: ST:MCTSI=a-0,ucl Where:...
Page 734 235-105-210 October 1999 MV MCTSI=a-1 COMPLETED Response: 11.28.14 Power Down MCTSI Side 1 At MCTS side 1 (SN516), simultaneously depress the Manual OverRide (MOR) and OFF button. EPT PW OFF MCTSI=a-1 Response: Where: a = SM-2000 number. 11.28.15 Disconnect Side 1 ETS Connectors from TSIU4 Obtain the side 1 cable ED and group numbers from J-Drawing J5D003NB-1.
Page 735 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the selected GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the value for each key (*) attribute listed. Response: System completes remainder of form. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Type and enter 2 SWITCHING MODLUE SC EEN 2 of 5 page is displayed. Response: Type and enter C Change field:...
Page 736 235-105-210 October 1999 11.28.19 Conditionally estore MCTSI Side 1 to Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command: ST:MCTSI=a-1 Where: a = SM-2000 number. ST MCTSI=a-1 COMPLETED Response: 11.28.20 Soak Period CAUTION: Although not mandatory, a minimal soak period of 1 hour is strongly suggested. STOP.
Page 737 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.29: G OW DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 FACILITY 5E12 AND EA LIE OVE VIEW This procedure grows digital networking unit - SONET (DNU-S) virtual tributary 1.5/digital signal 1 (VT1.5/DS1) facilities. Separate growth procedures exist for growing the DNU-S SONET termination equipment (DNU-S STE) facilities and synchronous transport signal (STS-1) facilities.
Page 738 235-105-210 October 1999 602 (1800 CMD) INH: EX,SM =a; Where: number of the SM-2000 growing the VT1.5/DS1 facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH; esponse: The inhibit status will be printed. f Steps 4 and 5 were performed, verify the inhibit status printout. 11.29.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery Messages to be Printed At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,TOBKUP;...
Page 739 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: 11.29.3 Back Up Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 740 235-105-210 October 1999 eference: Procedure 11.1 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 19.14 esponse: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET (SM-2000) page displayed. Type and enter appropriate data for each attribute listed in the following display. 1. SM 2. DNUS esponse: System completes remainder of view.
Page 741 235-105-210 October 1999 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STS . VT Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each of the remaining attributes. The VT and DS1S EQSTAT attributes for the VT1.5 and DS1 Facilities being grown default to G. esponse: Enter Insert, Change, Validate, or Print: Type and enter i...
Page 742 235-105-210 October 1999 Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STS . VT esponse: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Verify the data previously entered for the VT1.5/DS1 Facility is consistent with the work order form.
Page 743 235-105-210 October 1999 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 24 esponse: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM-2000) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Type and enter appropriate data for each attribute listed in the following display. 1.
Page 744 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1511,b,cd,a Where: SM-2000 number. DNU-S number Data group number STS-1 facility number NOTE: Verify that the DNU-S VT1.5 facility has no associated CGA and remains in service. Repeat Step 1 for the parent STS-1 of each VT1.5 facility being grown. Then continue with next Step. To perform final growth, go to Section 11.29.25 11.29.17 Verify and Update VT1.5 Facility Data to Operational At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 24U...
Page 745 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Type and enter U esponse: updating ..FO M UPDATED DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM-2000) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for each VT1.5 Facility being grown. Then continue with next Step. Type and enter <...
Page 746 235-105-210 October 1999 ST:VT1FAC=a-b-c-d-e; Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data group number STS-1 facility number VT1.5 facility number. esponse: ST VT1FAC=a-b-c-d-e COMPLETED NOTE: No EPT FAC ALE T or EPT CGA output messages should be seen for this facility. Repeat Step 1 for each VT1.5 facility being grown. Then continue with next Section. 11.29.20 Verify VT1.5 Facility At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1511,b,cd,a...
Page 747 235-105-210 October 1999 Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STS . VT esponse: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Type and enter C esponse:...
Page 748 235-105-210 October 1999 . VT esponse: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-insert, Validate, or Print: Verify data is consistent with the corresponding work order form. Comment: Correct any errors using terminal in the update mode. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each DS1 Facility being grown. Then continue with next Step. Type and enter <...
Page 749 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Verify that the DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 facility has no associated CGA and remains in service. Repeat Step 1 for the parent STS-1 of each VT1.5/DS1 facility being grown. Then continue with next Section. 11.29.27 Back Up Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable.
Page 750 235-105-210 October 1999 CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP; esponse: 11.29.29 eturn outine Exercises to Normal At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 702 (1800,a CMD) ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: SM-2000 inhibited. esponse: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 14...
Page 751 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.30: DEG OW DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 FACILITY 5E12 AND EA LIE OVE VIEW This procedure degrows Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) Virtual Tributary 1.5/Digital Signal 1 (VT1.5/DS1) facilities. Separate degrowth procedures exist for degrowing the DNU-S SONET Termination Equipment (STE) facilities and Synchronous Transport Signal (STS-1) facilities.
Page 752 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=pfr_mon,P INT=ON,LOG=OFF Response: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: SET:PE PH,SM =a,VE BOSE Where: a = SM-2000 number. Response: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: INH:B EVC,SM =a Where: a = SM-2000 number.
Page 753 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1511,a,b,c Where: a = DNU-S number of degrowth VT1.5/DS1 b = STS-1 Facility number c = SM-2000 number. At the MCC, verify that the Parent STS-1 Facility is in service. 11.30.6 Safe Stop Point Safe Stop Point.
Page 754 235-105-210 October 1999 DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM-2000) page displayed. Response: Cursor at SM-2000 attribute. Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. 1.
Page 755 235-105-210 October 1999 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED or CV MENU APP C COMPLETED Response: 11.30.11 eorganize Hashed elations At MCC, type and enter EXC: EO G EPT EO G COMPLETED ELATION a Response: Wait 5 minutes after each completed message for additional responses before continuing.
Page 756 235-105-210 October 1999 procedure. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: ALW:B EVC, SM=a Where: a = SM-2000 number. Response: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CL :PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE Where: a = SM-2000 number. Response: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP...
Page 757 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.31: G OW DNU-S STE/STS-1 FACILITY 5E10(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure grows Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) SONET Termination Equipment (STE) and Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) facilities. Two separate growth procedures exist for growing the DNU-S Virtual Tributary 1.5/Digital Signal 1 (VT1.5/DS1) facilities.
Page 758 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH; Response: The inhibit status will be printed. f Steps 5 and 6 were performed, verify the inhibit status printout. 11.31.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery Messages to be Printed At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,TOBKUP;...
Page 759 235-105-210 October 1999 BKUP:ODD; esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED Note: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.31.4 Verify TMUX Equipage at MCC At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1510,b,a Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number. Verify that the service TMUX that corresponds to the STE facility being grown is displayed. 11.31.5 Safe Stop Point This is a safe stop point 11.31.6 Insert STE and STS-1 Facility Data Into Data Base...
Page 760 235-105-210 October 1999 DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET FO STE AND STS (SM-2000) page displayed. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each STE and STS-1 facility being grown. Type and enter < 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Response: 11.31.7 Verify STE and STS-1 Facility Data At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.12...
Page 761 235-105-210 October 1999 Carefully plug the SL paddle board into the backplane of SF 0. Then loop the facility at the SL . 11.31.10 Diagnose Standby SFI NOTE: An ATP must be achieved for this diagnostic before continuing. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 52cd,G OW,PH=1&&9 (1510,b, a CMD) DGN:SFI=a-b-c-d,G OW, AW,TLP,PH=1&&9;...
Page 762 235-105-210 October 1999 DNU-S number Data Group number. esponse: SW SFI a b c COMPLETED 11.31.13 Diagnose Standby SFI NOTE: An ATP must be achieved for this diagnostic before continuing. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 52cd,G OW,PH=1&&9 (1510,b,a CMD) DGN:SFI=a-b-c-d,G OW, AW,TLP,PH=1&&9;...
Page 763 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter appropriate data for each attribute listed in the following display. RECENT CHANGE 20.12 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STE Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter C Response: Change Field:...
Page 764 235-105-210 October 1999 RECENT CHANGE 20.12 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STE Response: System completes remainder of view. Enter eview, Change-insert, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Verify data is consistent with the corresponding work order form. Comment: Correct any errors using terminal in the update mode.
Page 765 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data Group number STE Facility number. esponse: ST STEFAC (or EC1STE) a b c d COMPLETED NOTE: No EPT FAC ALE T, EPT STEFAC (or EC1STE), or EPT CGA output messages should be seen for this facility.
Page 766 235-105-210 October 1999 Change Field: Response: Type and enter STSEQSTAT or field number Response: Cursor at STS EQSTAT attribute. Type and enter O Response: Change Field: Enter CA IAGE ETU N. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating ..FO M UPDATED Response: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET FO STE AND STS (SM-2000) page displayed.
Page 767 235-105-210 October 1999 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each STS-1 facility being grown. Type and enter < 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED or CV MENU APP C COMPLETED Response: 11.31.25 estore STS-1 Facility to Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command:...
Page 768 235-105-210 October 1999 STE Facility number STS-1 Facility number. Verify that the DNU-S STS-1 facility has no CGA and remains in service. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each STS-1 facility being grown. 11.31.27 Back Up Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable.
Page 769 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: 11.31.29 eturn outine Exercises to Normal At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 702 (1800,a CMD) ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: a = SM-2000 inhibited. Response: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 13...
Page 770 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.32: DEG OW DNU-S STE/STS-1 FACILITY - 5E10(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure degrows Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) SONET Termination Equipment (STE) and Synchronous Transport Signal (STS-1) facilities. Two separate degrowth procedures exist for degrowing the DNU-S Virtual Tributary 1.5/Digital Signal 1 (VT1.5/DS1) facilities.
Page 771 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: a = number of the SM-2000 degrowing the STE/STS-1 Facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: INH: EX,SM=a; Where: number of the SM-2000 degrowing the STE/STS-1 Facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH;...
Page 772 235-105-210 October 1999 11.32.3 Back Up Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete.
Page 773 235-105-210 October 1999 MV:STSFAC=a-b-c-d-e; Where: SM-2000 number. DNU-S number Data Group number STE Facility number STS-1 Facility number esponse: MV STSFAC a b c e (or a b c d e) COMPLETED Repeat Step 1 for each STS-1 facility being degrown. 11.32.7 emove STE Facility from Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command:...
Page 774 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. RECENT CHANGE 20.12 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STE Enter Delete, Validate, or Print: Response: Type and enter D Response:...
Page 775 235-105-210 October 1999 11.32.10 Verify STS-1 Facility Has Been Degrown At the MCC, type and enter the following command: For E12(1) and Earlier: 1511,b,ce,a For E13(1) and Later: 1511,b,cde,a Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data Group number STE Facility number STS-1 Facility number.
Page 776 235-105-210 October 1999 32cd,STBY (1510,b,a CMD) ST:SFI=a-b-c-d,STBY; Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data Group number Standby SF number. esponse: ST SFI a b c d COMPLETED 11.32.15 Switch SFIs CAUTION: This SF switch will generate transient errors on the facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 42c, UCL(1510,b,a) SW:SFI=a-b-c,UCL;...
Page 777 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. 11.32.19 Inhibit Additional Fault ecovery Message Printing NOTE: Wait one-half hour before starting this procedure and monitor the ROP for "ANALYS S ONLY,"...
Page 778 235-105-210 October 1999 ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: a = SM-2000 inhibited. Response: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 9...
Page 779 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.33: G OW MESSAGE HANDLE PIPE - 5E9(2) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure grows and activates a message handler (MH) pipe in an SM-2000. Each pipe is grown by inserting the data on the MH pipe assignment view at the recent change/verify (RC/V) terminal. NOTE: Before growing an MH pipe, QLPS 0-0, 0-1, 1-0, and 1-1 must be operational and in service, and the SM-2000 must be operational.
Page 780 235-105-210 October 1999 inserting ..FO M INSE TED Response: MH PIPE HANDLE page displayed. Cursor at QLPS NETWORK attribute. s data for both QLPS networks inserted? f NO, repeat Step 2 for "mate" QLPS network on this SM-2000. f YES, continue with next Step. Type and enter <...
Page 781 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.34: DEG OW MESSAGE HANDLE PIPE - 5E9(2) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure degrows a message handler (MH) pipe. Each pipe is degrown by deleting the data on the MH pipe assignment view at the recent change/verify (RC/V) terminal. Before degrowing an MH pipe, the SM-2000 where the MH resides should be manually quad-link packet switch (QLPS) isolated.
Page 782 235-105-210 October 1999 VFY: TBM; NOTE: f the RTBM is not empty RTCD billing records may be lost unless these can be transferred to the global billing SM. To transfer RTCD billing records, refer to 235-200-110, Long Distance Platform. 11.34.2 Isolate SM-2000 from QLPS At the MCC, type and enter SET-ISOL:SM=x,QLPS Where: x = SM-2000 number...
Page 783 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, continue with next Step. Type and enter < 17.0 CM MODULE VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.34.4 Verify Status of Deleted MH Pipes Wait 5 minutes to ensure stable operation. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP:qnetstat,srcsm=SM-2000 number PF follows...
Page 784 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.35: DEG OW AMA PA TITION FO SMD-MHD PAI ON 3B20D MODEL 3 - 5E9 AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure degrows the AMA partitions on a pair of Duplex Disk Drives (SMD or SCS ). The degrowth pair of ®...
Page 785 235-105-210 October 1999 There are two AMA partitions on each degrowth disk pair which are in normal (available to be written to) use. f the system AMA write pointers are within these two partitions, the degrowth procedure must be delayed until the pointers have advanced beyond the AMA partitions on the degrowth disk pair.
Page 786 235-105-210 October 1999 2 /dev/ama2 xx 3 /dev/ama3 xx 4 /dev/ama4 xx 5 /dev/ama5 xx . . . y /dev/amay xx z /dev/amaz xx Where: a is ST1 or ST2. xx is the number of blocks in each AMA disk partition. y and z are the highest AMA partition numbers.
Page 787 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: f for Single Stream Offices OP:AMA:MAPS; f for Dual Stream Offices OP:AMA:MAPS,ST1; OP:AMA:MAPS,ST2; Response: REPT AMA D SK MAPS FOR STREAM a WR TE PART T ON b READ PART T ON c PART T ON d D SK MAP: FPO: xx LPO: xx...
Page 788 235-105-210 October 1999 SEQUENCE NUMBERS x THROUGH y MUST BE RETR EVED AGA N AS SECONDARY DATA f NO, continue with next Section. f YES, then retransmit the secondary data as indicated in message (Repeat retransmission until all AMA data is transmitted successfully). 11.35.4 Unequip AMA Partition Telephone Company Function At the MCC, type and enter:...
Page 789 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: f for Single Stream Offices OP:AMA:MAPS; f for Dual Stream Offices OP:AMA:MAPS,ST1; OP:AMA:MAPS,ST2; Response for Single/Dual Stream Offices: REPT AMA D SK MAPS FOR STREAM a WR TE PART T ON b READ PART T ON c PART T ON d D SK MAP: FPO: xx LPO: xx...
Page 790 235-105-210 October 1999 Telephone Company Function The need for this step should be determined by the AMA data center (RAO/HOC), if there is a problem with the transmission of primary data to the center. ---AND/OR--- f primary AMA data has not been processed within the last 24 hours, it should be performed at this time to reduce the amount of primary AMA data stored on the nondegrowth disks.
Page 791 235-105-210 October 1999 y /dev/amaz xx z /dev/amaz xx Where: a is ST1 or ST2. xx is number of blocks in each AMA disk partition. y and z are the highest AMA partition. 11.35.8 Process Secondary AMA Data Telephone Company Function Teleprocess or write to tape the secondary AMA data needed by AMA center.
Page 792 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 9...
Page 793 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.36: CLEAN SMALL COMPUTE SYSTEM INTE FACE (SCSI) TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW Clean tape path, tape heads, and tapes reduce read/write errors, shorten read/write times, and lengthen tape life. Routine cleaning of the tape drive significantly increases its performance. A tape sheds binder and oxide during normal tape operations.
Page 794 235-105-210 October 1999 f KS-23909, L21 9-Track Tape Drive, then go to Procedure 11.36.3 . f NC 006-3503341 DAT, then go to Procedure 11.36.4 . f NC 006-3300608 DAT, then go to Procedure 11.36.4 . 11.36.2 KS-23909, L10 9-Track Tape Drive OVE VIEW Table 11.36.2-1 indicates a cleaning frequency and a suitable cleaner for various parts of the KS-23909, L10 9-track tape drive.
Page 795 235-105-210 October 1999 ST:MT=x; Where: x = tape drive number. NOTE: Use an antistatic cleaner and a cloth for cleaning the tape path cover. Use a cloth moistened with soapy water to wipe the fascia and painted surfaces. Are there other tape drives to be cleaned? f YES, then return to Section 11.36.1 , Step 2.
Page 796 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 11.36.2-1 Tape Path Components 11.36.3 KS-23909, L21 9-Track Tape Drive OVE VIEW Copyright © 1999 Page 4...
Page 797 235-105-210 October 1999 Use only high-quality electronic-grade isopropyl alcohol of at least 90 percent concentration as a cleaning solvent. The isopropyl mixture must consist of alcohol and distilled water only. Use only nonabrasive, lint-free cloths, and/or swabs to clean the tape path. Follow these precautions: ...
Page 798 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, to remove the tape drive to be cleaned from service, type and enter the following command: MV:MT=x; Where: x = tape drive number. Pour a small amount of solvent into a clean container, such as a small UNWAXED paper cup or, if the cleaner comes in a squeeze bottle, squeeze a small amount on a lint-free cloth or swab.
Page 799 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 11.36.3-1 Cleaning Points Copyright © 1999 Page 7...
Page 800 235-105-210 October 1999 11.36.4 NC 006-3503341 DAT and NC 006-3300608 DAT OVE VIEW The UN376 and UN376B cirucit packs uses the NCR 006-3503341 DAT. The UN376C circuit pack uses the NCR 006-3300608 DAT. The tape heads should be cleaned after every 25 hours of operation. The tape heads should also be cleaned if ``Caution'' is signaled by the following indicators: Condition Cassette...
Page 801 235-105-210 October 1999 Copyright © 1999 Page 9...
Page 802 235-105-210 October 1999 Figure 11.36.4-1 SCSI DAT Drive Circuit Pack, Front View [UN376,B (NC 006-3503341) or UN376C (NC 006-3300608)] Copyright © 1999 Page 10...
Page 803 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.37: CLEAN KS-23113 TAPE D IVE OVE VIEW f further information is required regarding any of these instructions, refer to the manufactures manuals: LMS P/N 49762900 and/or P/N 49763000 Hardware Maintenance Manuals. P OCEDU E Open tape drive front door. At control panel, press LOGIC OFF switch. Response: LOGIC OFF light-emitting diode (LED) lighted.
Page 804 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: LOGIC ON LED lighted. Figure 11.37-1 Magnetic Tape Head Components Figure 11.37-2 Magnetic Tape Supply eel Hub Pads STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 2...
Page 805 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.38: PE FO M O M ET CONNECTION 5E9(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure provides the necessary steps to connect an External Timing Source (ETS) via an External Timing Reference (ETR) from the Dual Link nterface (DL ) of an Optical Remote Switching Module (ORM). One such appropriate external timing source which can be connected via the ETR would be the Building ntegrated Timing Supply (B TS) Clock.
Page 806 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter command 1260 CLNK SUMMA Y page displayed. Response: At MCC, type and enter command 126a Where: a = logical link map (1 through 4) reflecting the converting SM Response: LOGICAL LINK MAP a page displayed. View Path 0 and Path 1 ONTC columns of the converting SM.
Page 807 235-105-210 October 1999 Disengage the side 0 MCTU fuse, as pictured in bezel diagram, by twisting the fuse to the left and pulling the fuse. 11.38.7 Disengage Side 0 Pin Protectors from the Backplane Disengage the side 0 plastic pin protectors from the backplane according to the following EQL: TERM 119-156 119-156...
Page 808 235-105-210 October 1999 11.38.13 Power Up the DLI Side 0 At DL side 0 (TN1077), depress the ON button. Where: a = SM number EPT PW ON DLI=a-0 Response: 11.38.14 Update the Dual Link Interface (DLI) Side 0 Change Level Indicator (CLI) Value Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify (RCV) activities.
Page 809 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED...
Page 810 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify completion of MCTS restoral in the ROP prior to continuing. MCTS must be in active/standby configuration before continuing. Type and enter command 126a Where: a = logical link map (1 through 4) reflecting the converting SM LOGICAL LINK MAP a page displayed.
Page 811 235-105-210 October 1999 11.38.21 Disengage Side 1 DLI Pack Disengage the side 1 DL pack (TN1077) from SM frame. 11.38.22 Disengage Side 1 MCTU Fuse Locate the side 1 MCTU fuse in the switching cabinet bezel according to the following EQL: 128-156 Disengage the side 1 MCTU fuse, as pictured in bezel diagram, by twisting the fuse to the left and pulling the fuse.
Page 812 235-105-210 October 1999 11.38.27 eseat Side 1 MCTU Fuse Reseat the side 1 MCTU Fuse and twist the fuse to the right according to the following EQL: 128-156 11.38.28 eseat DLI Side 1 Pack Reseat and engage the DL side 1 pack (TN1077) into the SM frame. 11.38.29 Power Up the DLI Side 1 At DL side 1 (TN1077), depress the ON button.
Page 813 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 14 Response: Cursor at DL 1 CL attribute. Type and enter value from GRCV form. Change field: Response: Hit CARR AGE RETURN. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed.
Page 814 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter command 126a Where: a = logical link map (1 through 4) reflecting the converting SM LOGICAL LINK MAP a page displayed. Response: Verify the CLNKs of the converting SM are linked to ONTC sides 0 and 1. STOP.
Page 815 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.39: PE FO M O M ET DISCONNECTION 5E9(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure provides the necessary steps to disconnect an External Timing Source (ETS) via an External Timing Reference (ETR) from the Dual Link nterface (DL ) from an Optical Remote Module (ORM). One such appropriate external timing source which can be connected via the ETR would be the Building ntergrated Timing Supply (B TS) Clock.
Page 816 235-105-210 October 1999 11.39.3 emove DLI Side 0 from Service Type and enter: MV:DLI=a-0 Where: a = SM number MV DLI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: Type and enter CMD 126a Where: a = logical link map (1 through 4) reflecting the converting SM LOGICAL LINK MAP a page displayed.
Page 817 235-105-210 October 1999 11.39.8 Disconnect Side 0 ET Cable Connector from the DLI Obtain the side 0 cable ED and group numbers from J-Drawing J-5D003LA-1 (see engineering note #66). Disconnect the ETS cable from the following EQL: TERM 119-156 11.39.9 Disengage the 127C Apparatus Mounting etainer for Side 0 Disengage the 127C retainer from the following EQL: TERM 119-156...
Page 818 235-105-210 October 1999 At the RCV terminal, type and enter 18.1 Response: Enter Database Operation I=Insert = eview U=Update D=Delete Type and enter U Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Select the completed Growth RCV (GRCV) form, 18.1, for the identified SM. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: *1 SM Using the selected GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the value for each key (*) attribute listed.
Page 819 235-105-210 October 1999 11.39.15 Inhibit Hardware and Software Interrupts Type and enter INH:HDWCHK,MCTSI=a-0,ALL Where: a = SM number INH HDWCHK MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: Type and enter ALW:SFTCHK,SM=a Where: a = SM number Response: 11.39.16 Diagnose the Side 0 External eference At the MCC, type and enter: DGN:DLI=a-0, AW,TLP Where: a = SM number...
Page 820 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter ALW:HDWCHK,MCTSI=a-0,ALL Where: a = SM number ALW HDWCHK MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: Type and enter ALW:SFTCHK,SM=a Where: a = SM number Response: 11.39.19 emove DLI Side 1 from Service Type and enter: MV:DLI=a-1 Where: a = SM number MV DLI=a-1 COMPLETED...
Page 821 235-105-210 October 1999 fuse. 11.39.23 Disengage Side 1 Shorting Connector 963E-2 Disengage the side 1 shorting connector 963E-2 from the backplane of the switching cabinet according to the following EQL: TERM 128-156 NOTE: See manufacturer note 21 for 963E-2 installation instructions. 11.39.24 Disconnect Side 1 ET Cable Connector from the DLI Obtain the side 1 cable ED and group numbers from J-Drawing J-5D003LA-1 (see engineering note #66).
Page 822 235-105-210 October 1999 At DL side 1 (TN1077), depress the ON button. Where: a = SM number Response: EPT PW ON DLI=a-1 11.39.30 Update the DLI Side 1 CLI Value Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify (RCV) activities. Reference: Procedure 11.1 At the RCV terminal, type and enter 18.1...
Page 823 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.39.31 Diagnose the Side 1 External eference At the MCC, type and enter: DGN:DLI=a-1, AW,TLP...
Page 824 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.40: CONNECT VE Y COMPACT DIGITAL EXCHANGE (VCDX) EXTE NAL TIMING SOU CE (ETS) 5E9(2) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure connects an External Timing Source (ETS) via a T1 interface to the Dual Link nterface (DL ) of a VCDX Switching Module (SM).
Page 825 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter: INH: EX,SM=a Where: a = SM number Response: At the MCC, type and enter: OP: EXINH Response: The inhibit status will be printed. 11.40.2 Back Up Office Dependent Data At the MCC, type and enter: BKUP:ODD BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response: 11.40.3 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery Messages to be Printed...
Page 826 235-105-210 October 1999 MV DLI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: 11.40.5 Power Down the DLI Side 0 At DL side 0 (TN1077), depress the OFF button. EPT PW OFF DLI=a-0 Response: Where: a = SM number 11.40.6 Disengage Side 0 DLI Pack Disengage side 0 DL pack (TN1077) from cabinet location 19-156. 11.40.7 emove Side 0 DLI Cables Using drawing ED5D765-17 remove the following Cable Group Connectors.
Page 827 235-105-210 October 1999 11.40.11 Install the Side 0 ED5D585-29 Group 42 Shorting Connector nstall the side 0 ED5D585-29 Group 42 shorting connector from J-drawing J-5D003LA-1 List DW according to the following EQL: TE M 119-156 11.40.12 Install the First Side 0 Loop-Back cable nstall the first side 0 loop-back cable ED5D651-25 Group 14 from J-drawing J-5D003LA-1 List DX according to the following EQL: F OM...
Page 828 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT PW ON DLI=a-0 Response: Where: a = SM number 11.40.17 Update the Dual Link Interface (DLI) Side 0 Change Level Indicator (CLI) Value Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify (RCV) activities. Reference: Procedure 11.1 At the RCV terminal, type and enter 18.1 Enter Database Operation Response:...
Page 829 235-105-210 October 1999 updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.40.18 Diagnose the Side 0 DLI Type and enter: DGN:DLI=a-0 Where: a = SM number...
Page 830 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: 11.40.20 Unconditionally estore DLI Side 0 to Service Type and enter: ST:DLI=a-0,ucl Where: a = SM number ST DLI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: From MCC page 1190, are DL =a-0 and the External Timing Source connected to the DL both active? f NO, SEEK TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE.
Page 831 235-105-210 October 1999 ALW HDWCHK DLI=a-1 COMPLETED Response: Type and enter ALW:SFTCHK,SM=a Where: a = SM number Response: 11.40.23 Power Down the DLI Side 1 At DL side 1 (TN1077), depress the OFF button. EPT PW OFF DLI=a-1 Response: Where: a = SM number 11.40.24 Disengage Side 1 DLI Pack Disengage side 1 DL pack (TN1077) from cabinet location 28-156.
Page 832 235-105-210 October 1999 nstall the side 1 963E-2 shorting connector from J-drawing J-5D003LA-1 List DL according to the following EQLs: F OM F OM TERM TERM 128-156 128-156 11.40.29 Install the Side 1 ED5D585-29 Group 42 Shorting Connector nstall the side 1 ED5D585-29 Group 42 shorting connector from J-drawing J-5D003LA-1 List DW according to the following EQL: TE M 128-156...
Page 833 235-105-210 October 1999 11.40.34 Power Up the DLI Side 1 At DL side 1 (TN1077), depress the ON button. EPT PW ON DLI=a-1 Response: Where: a = SM number 11.40.35 Update the DLI Side 1 CLI Value Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify (RCV) activities. Procedure 11.1 Reference: At the RCV terminal, type and enter 18.1...
Page 834 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: SWITCHING MODULE SC EEN 1 of 5 page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED...
Page 835 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter: MV:MCTSI=a-0 Where: a = SM number MV MCTSI=a-0 COMPLETED Response: 11.40.40 Power Down the MCTSI Side 0 At MCTS side 0 depress the OFF button. EPT PW OFF MCTSI=a-0 Response: Where: a = SM number 11.40.41 Disengage Side 0 CSC Pack Disengage side 0 CSC pack (TN1838) from cabinet location 19-120.
Page 836 235-105-210 October 1999 11.40.45 Insert Apparatus Blank nsert Apparatus Blank into cabinet location 19-120. 11.40.46 Power Up the MCTSI Side 0 At MCTS side 0 depress the ON button. EPT PW ON MCTSI=a-0 Response: Where: a = SM number 11.40.47 Diagnose the Side 0 MCTSI Type and enter: DGN:MCTSI=a-0 Where: a = SM number...
Page 837 235-105-210 October 1999 11.40.51 Disengage Side 1 CSC Pack Disengage side 1 CSC pack (TN1838) from cabinet location 28-120. 11.40.52 Disengage Side 1 MCTU Fuse Locate the side 1 MCTU fuse in the switching cabinet bezel. 128-156 Disengage the side 1 MCTU fuse, as pictured in bezel diagram, by twisting the fuse to the left and pulling the fuse.
Page 838 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter: DGN:MCTSI=a-1 Where: a = SM number DGN MCTSI=a-1 COMPLETED ATP Response: 11.40.58 Unconditionally estore MCTSI Side 1 Type and enter: ST:MCTSI=a-1,ucl Where: a = SM number ST MCTSI=a-1 COMPLETED Response: 11.40.59 Back Up Office Dependent Data At the MCC, type and enter: BKUP:ODD Response: BKUP ODD COMPLETED...
Page 839 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 16...
Page 840 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.41: CONVE T DATA-FANOUT TO DATA-FANOUT WITH MULTIPLE PE IPHE AL INTE FACE DATA BUS 5E10(1) AND LATE SOFTWA E ELEASE OVE VIEW The data fanout (DF) to data fanout with multiple peripheral interface data bus (DF-MP) conversion procedure converts a packet switch unit (PSU) or PSU model 2 (PSU2) shelf containing DF circuitry, capable of utilizing a single time slot interchange (TS ) interface data bus (P DB), to a PSU/PSU2 shelf containing DF-MP circuitry, capable of utilizing multiple TS P DBs.
Page 841 235-105-210 October 1999 not previously scheduled. Continue with Step 4. Record and save the schedule information for later reference. This is important since the next command clears the backups scheduled. Type and enter CL :ODDBKUP CL ODDBKUP COMPLETED Response: Type and enter BKUP:ODD Response: BKUP ODD COMPLETED 11.41.2.2 Inhibit outine Exercises...
Page 842 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter INH: EX,CM Response: Type and enter OP:DMQ,CM OP DMQ CM LAST ECO D Response: ACTION UNIT OPTION SOU CE STATUS OP DMQ CM HAS NO EQUESTS ON THE DMQ Were there active or waiting CM diagnostic requests listed? f NO, go to Step 11.
Page 843 235-105-210 October 1999 Manually restore any OOS SM units. 11.41.2.3 Inhibit Automatic Data Base elation eorganization At MCC, type and enter INH: EO G Response: 11.41.2.4 Turn On Fault ecovery eports At MCC, type and enter SET:PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE Where: a = SM number Response: 11.41.2.5 Save Office Message Class Print Options and Allow ALL Message Classes to Print...
Page 844 235-105-210 October 1999 Select the completed growth RC/V (GRCV) form 22.2 for the identified PSU. Using the GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the values for the key (*) and required (#) attribute fields. esponse: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: On the RC/V form 22.2, what is the value of the C IT PSU attribute? f Y(es), continue with next Section.
Page 845 235-105-210 October 1999 11.41.6 CONDITIONALLY ESTO E PSU COMMON SIDE 1 At the MCC, type and enter ST:PSUCOM=a-b-1 Where: a = SM number b = PSU number = 0 ST PSUCOM=a-b-1 COMPLETED Response: NOTE: A COMPLETED response must be achieved in this Step before continuing. 11.41.7 DIAGNOSE PSU COMMON SIDE 0 At the MCC, type and enter DGN:PSUCOM=a-b-0 Where:...
Page 846 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 16 Response: Cursor at CL SG0 attribute. Type and enter the value corresponding to the CL SG0 attribute on the GRCV form. Response: Change field: Enter CA IAGE ETU N. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED...
Page 847 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: EQUIPMENT UNIT -- PACKET SWITCH UNIT SHELF (1-4) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Type and enter < 22.0 ISDN -- EQUIPMENT VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED...
Page 848 235-105-210 October 1999 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 22.2U esponse: EQUIPMENT UNIT -- PACKET SWITCH UNIT page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Select the completed GRCV form 22.2 for the identified PSU. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: ____ ____...
Page 849 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the selected GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the value for each KEY (* ) attribute listed. System completes remainder of form. Response: Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Type and enter C Change field: Response: Type and enter 4 Response:...
Page 850 235-105-210 October 1999 ST PSUCOM=a-b-1 COMPLETED Response: NOTE: A COMPLETED response must be achieved in this Step before continuing. 11.41.15 VALIDATE PSU STATE Was the original CR T state of PSU in Section 11.41.4 = Y(es)? f YES, then continue to Section 11.41.16 f NO, then go to Section 11.41.17 .
Page 851 235-105-210 October 1999 11.41.17 SAFE STOP POINT Safe stop point. 11.41.18 ESTO E CONT OLS 11.41.18.1 Allow Brevity Control At MCC, type and enter ALW:B EVC,SM=a Where: a = SM number Response: 11.41.18.2 eturn Message Classes to Previous Print Status At MCC, type and enter CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP Response: 11.41.18.3 Turn Off Fault ecovery eports...
Page 852 235-105-210 October 1999 11.41.18.6 eorganize Hashed elations At MCC, type and enter EXC: EO G EPT EO G COMPLETED ELATION a Response: Wait 5 minutes after each completed message for additional responses before continuing. Where: a = ALL 11.41.18.7 Backup Office Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter BKUP:ODD BKUP ODD COMPLETED Response:...
Page 853 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.42: CONVE T DATA-FANOUT WITH MULTIPLE PE IPHE AL INTE FACE DATA BUS TO DATA-FANOUT 5E10(1) AND LATE SOFTWA E OVE VIEW The data fanout with multiple peripheral interface data bus (DF-MP) to data fanout (DF) conversion procedure converts a packet switch unit (PSU) or PSU model 2 (PSU2) shelf containing DF-MP circuitry, capable of utilizing multiple time slot interchange (TS ) peripheral interface data bus (P DB), to a PSU/PSU2 shelf containing DF circuitry, capable of utilizing a single TS P DB.
Page 854 235-105-210 October 1999 Comment: f NG - NO SCHEDULE EQUEST is the response received, then automatic backups were not previously scheduled. Continue with Step 4. Record and save the schedule information for later reference. This is important since the next command clears the backups scheduled.
Page 855 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: Type and enter OP:DMQ,CM OP DMQ CM LAST ECO D Response: ACTION UNIT OPTION SOU CE STATUS OP DMQ CM HAS NO EQUESTS ON THE DMQ Were there active or waiting CM diagnostic requests listed? f NO, go to Step 11. f YES, continue.
Page 856 235-105-210 October 1999 11.42.2.3 Inhibit Automatic Data Base elation eorganization At MCC, type and enter INH: EO G Response: 11.42.2.4 Turn On Fault ecovery eports At MCC, type and enter SET:PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE Where: a = SM number Response: 11.42.2.5 Save Office Message Class Print Options and Allow ALL Message Classes to Print At MCC, type and enter CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,TOBKUP OK (with exception) Response:...
Page 857 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the values for the key (*) and required (#) attribute fields. esponse: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: On the RC/V form 22.2, what is the value of the C IT PSU attribute? f Y(es), continue with next Section.
Page 858 235-105-210 October 1999 At MCC, type and enter ST:PSUCOM=a-b-1 Where: a = SM number b = PSU number = 0 Response: ST PSUCOM=a-b-1 COMPLETED NOTE: A COMPLETED response must be achieved in this step before continuing. 11.42.7 DIAGNOSE PSU COMMON SIDE 0 At MCC, type and enter DGN:PSUCOM=a-b-0, AW,TLP Where: a = SM number...
Page 859 235-105-210 October 1999 Response: Cursor at CL SG0 attribute. Type and enter the value corresponding to the CL SG0 attribute on the GRCV form. Response: Change field: Enter CA IAGE ETU N. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response:...
Page 860 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter U updating...FO M UPDATED Response: EQUIPMENT UNIT -- PACKET SWITCH UNIT SHELF (1-4) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Type and enter < 22.0 ISDN -- EQUIPMENT VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter Q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.42.9 CONVE T DATA FANOUT WITH MULTIPLE PE IPHE AL INTE FACE DATA BUS TO...
Page 861 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: EQUIPMENT UNIT -- PACKET SWITCH UNIT page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Select the completed GRCV form 22.2 for the identified PSU. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: ____ ____ Using the selected GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the value for each KEY (*) attribute listed.
Page 862 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Type and enter C Change field: Response: Type and enter 5 Response: Cursor at SG1 CL attribute. Type and enter the value corresponding to the SG1 CL attribute on the GRCV form. Change field: Response: Enter CA...
Page 863 235-105-210 October 1999 11.42.15 VALIDATE PSU STATE Was the original CR T state of PSU in Section 11.42.4 = Y(es)? f YES, then continue to Section 11.42.16 f NO, then go to Section 11.42.17 . 11.42.16 ESTO E C IT PSU VALUE TO "Y" NOTE: This section should be performed only if the C IT PSU attribute on RC/V form was changed from Y to N in Section 11.42.5 At RC/V terminal, type and enter 22.2U...
Page 864 235-105-210 October 1999 Safe stop point. 11.42.18 ESTO E CONT OLS 11.42.18.1 Allow Brevity Control At MCC, type and enter ALW:B EVC,SM=a Where: a = SM number Response: 11.42.18.2 eturn Message Classes to Previous Print Status At MCC, type and enter CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP Response: 11.42.18.3 Turn Off Fault ecovery eports At MCC, type and enter CL :PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE...
Page 865 235-105-210 October 1999 11.42.18.6 Allow Automatic Data Base elation eorganization At MCC, type and enter ALW: EO G Response: 11.42.18.7 Back Up Office Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter BKUP:ODD Response: BKUP ODD COMPLETED 11.42.18.8 eschedule Automatic Office Dependent Data Backup, if necessary At MCC, type and enter BKUP:ODD,EVE Y=c,AT=d Where: c = interval in days (0-90) between successive ODD backup runs, recorded in earlier step...
Page 866 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.43: INTEG ATED SE VICES LINE UNIT MODEL 2 LINE CI CUIT SPA ING OPE ATIONS - 5E10 SOFTWA E ELEASE & LATE OVE VIEW The SLU2 LCKEN is defined as follows: LCKEN=SM-LU-LG-LBD-LCKT Where: SM = Switching module number LU = Line unit number LG = Line group number LBD = Line board number...
Page 867 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: Y = SLU2 number Z = LG number (obtained from LCKEN). Check if the faulty LCKT is OOS. f not, to remove the faulty LCKT from service, type and enter 22X,Y menu command. Where: X = LBD number Y = LCKT number NOTE: Camp-on occurs if the customer is using the line.
Page 868 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: a = SM number 11.43.4 Deactivate Spare Connection At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 4.23. At the parameter FAULTY OE enter LCKEN. To deactivate the sparing connection between the faulty and spare LCKTs, type and enter d deleting.
Page 869 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.44: CONVE T SM-2000 CO E 40 TO CO E 60 5E10(1) AND LATE SOFTWA E ELEASE OVE VIEW This procedure converts a live Switching Module-2000 (SM-2000) equipped with CORE40 (UN540 version) hardware to CORE60 (UN560 version) hardware. The CORE60 hardware consists of the UN560 processor core circuit pack which replaces the UN540 processor core circuit pack on each side of the Module Controller/Time Slot nterchange (MCTS ).
Page 870 235-105-210 October 1999 f Steps 4 and 5 were performed, verify the inhibit status printout. 11.44.2 Verify MCTSI Unit Functioning Without Fault Conditionally restore MCTS Side 0 by typing and entering: ST:MCTSI=a-0 Where: a = SM-2000 number ST MCTSI a 0 COMPLETED Response Conditionally restore MCTS Side 1 by typing and entering: ST:MCTSI=a-1 Where:...
Page 871 235-105-210 October 1999 f a 64 MB memory board is equipped in the highest numbered slot, that memory board will be deleted during this procedure. Record the last slot number. Configuration 2: f two 32 MB memory boards are equipped in each of the two highest numbered slots, those memory boards will be deleted during this procedure.
Page 872 235-105-210 October 1999 *1. SM Using the selected GRCV form as a guide, type and enter the value for each key (*) attribute listed. Response: System completes remainder of form. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Type and enter C Change field: Response: Type and enter 15...
Page 873 235-105-210 October 1999 Select the completed GRCV form 18.4, for the identified SM-2000. This form should have the KEY attributes listed in the following display: *1. SM *2. MC *3. POSITION Type and enter the value for each key attribute for the highest numbered memory board slot for MCTS Side Enter Delete, Validate, or Print: Response: Verify that the data is correct for the memory board being degrown.
Page 874 235-105-210 October 1999 WA NING: An antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling circuit packs or system cables to prevent damage to components. What is the equipped memory board configuration? Reference: Procedure 11.44.4 , Step 2. f Configuration 1, unseat the 64 MB memory board equipped in the highest numbered slot, and place it in the antistatic container.
Page 875 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: This procedure assumes the MCTS Side 1 is standby. f necessary, execute a switch to achieve this condition. f necessary, at the MCC, execute a switch by typing and entering: SW:MCTSI=a Where: a = SM-2000 number SW MCTSI a COMPLETED Response: At the MCC, remove MCTS Side 1 from service by typing and entering: MV:MCTSI=a-1...
Page 876 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter CA IAGE ETU N. Enter Update, Change, Validate, screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter U updating..FO M UPDATED Response: SW TCH NG MODULE (SM AND RSM MODULES) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Type and enter < 18.0 SM AND EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed.
Page 877 235-105-210 October 1999 f Configuration 2, repeat Steps 4 through 6 for for the memory board being deleted from the second highest numbered slot, then continue with Step 9. f Configuration 3, repeat Steps 4 through 6 for the memory board being deleted from the second highest slot, then continue with Step 8.
Page 878 235-105-210 October 1999 EPT PW ON MCTSI=a-1 Response: Where: a = SM-2000 number 11.44.22 Conditionally estore MCTSI Side 1 to Service Conditionally restore MCTS Side 1 by typing and entering: ST:MCTSI=a-1 Where: a = SM-2000 number ST MCTSI a 1 COMPLETED Response: 11.44.23 Allow Soak Period Allow MCTS Side 1 to be active for 1 hour before continuing with this procedure.
Page 879 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: a = SM-2000 number Response: 11.44.27 Back Up Office Dependent Data At MCC, type and enter: BKUP:ODD; NOTE: Prior to the given response, there will be completed responses for each SM, the AM, and the CMP, if applicable.
Page 880 -2000 using its Craft nterface Terminal (C T). Verify that the SLC-2000 Access System is operating on software version 4.01.00 or later. The 5ESS-2000 switch should be on a minimum Software Release level of 5E9(2) with Software Update BWM95-0018. f this is the first RT being converted to the TR303 interface on this ntegrated Digital Carrier Unit ( DCU), verify that the Directly Connected Peripheral nterface Data Bus (DP DB) assignments have been made and that the DP DB cables are in place.
Page 881 (10) Verify that the suppression method currently used by the TR008 RT will be supported by the TR303 RT. Procedure 11.45.1.6 details the steps to accomplish this. (11) Obtain a hard-copy of the active nail-up/hairpin cross-connects existing in the 5ESS-2000 Switch data base, and nailup/hairpin assignments existing in the SLC-2000 data base. Procedure 11.45.1.4 provides the input messages required to identify the active nailup/hairpin connections.
Page 882 235-105-210 October 1999 To inhibit REX, at the MCC type and enter: INH: EX,SM=a Where: a = SM that serves the VRT being converted to TR303 Response: OK At the MCC type and enter: OP: EXINH Response: The inhibit status will be printed. Verify REX is inhibited for the SM.
Page 883 235-105-210 October 1999 11.45.1.3 Identify IFACs Associated with the T 008 T Conversion At the MCC or trunk and line work station (TLWS) type and enter: 1870,y,x Where: y = DCU number x = SM number. Record the FACs that are associated with the VRT that will be converted to TR303. 11.45.1.4 Identify and Delete Nail-Up/Hairpin Connections dentify existing nailups, at the MCC, type and enter: OP:NAILUP,IFAC=a-b-c Where:...
Page 884 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC or TLWS type and enter: 1870,y,x Where: y = DCU number x = SM number. To remove the FAC, at the MCC or TLWS enter menu command: 2XX,UCL Where: XX = FAX number. Response: The status box associated with the FAC is back lighted in red, and the status display is OOS.
Page 885 235-105-210 October 1999 Change Field: Response: Enter CA IAGE ETU N Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print. Response: Type and enter u Response: updating . . . FO M UPDATED. EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at the SM attribute. Type and enter the KEY attributes.
Page 886 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter c Response: Change Field: Type and enter 5 Cursor at T INTE FACE attribute. Response: Type and enter T 303 Change Field: Response: Type and enter 15 Cursor at T 303 T EQSTAT attribute. Response: Type and enter O (letter 'O') Response:...
Page 887 235-105-210 October 1999 For 5E9(2) and earlier: Field 150: ow: Response: For 5E10(1) and later: Field 151: ow: Enter CA IAGE ETU N. Change Field: Response: Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 163 For 5E10(1) and later: 164 Cursor at EOC/TMC BKUP T TE M attribute. Response: Type and enter 3 Change Field:...
Page 888 235-105-210 October 1999 For 5E9(2) and earlier: 166 For 5E10(1) and later: 167 Cursor at NO ET ANS attribute. Response: Type and enter 3 Response: Change Field: Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 167 For 5E10(1) and later: 168 Cursor at UNACK F AMES attribute.
Page 889 235-105-210 October 1999 Change Field: Response: Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 175 For 5E10(1) and later: 176 Cursor at TMC NP I attribute. Response: Type and enter data from work order form. Note 3: The switch assigns values for the DP DB and T ME SLOT attributes. Change Field: Response: Type and enter:...
Page 890 235-105-210 October 1999 Note: See Step 8 (and Notes 1 and 2) at PREREQU S TE COND T ONS. f YES, continue with next step. f NO, go to Step 41. Type and enter 165 Cursor at ACKTIME Response: Type and enter 350 Change Field: Response: Enter CA...
Page 891 235-105-210 October 1999 CAUTION: Data must be backed out and reentered by using the following steps ONLY! At the RC/V terminal, View 18.15, type and enter ^ (Shift + 6) Enter Database Operation Response: I=Insert = eview U=Update D=Delete Type and enter u EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed.
Page 892 235-105-210 October 1999 18.0 SM and EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.45.1.11 Verify the Accuracy of T 303 Configuration Display At the MCC or TLWS type and enter: For 5E9(2) and later: 1880,y,z,x Where: y = DCU number z = RT number...
Page 893 235-105-210 October 1999 Verify RT hardware integrity. Note 2: This activity should be performed at the RT in accordance with procedures outlined in 363-208-001, SLC-2000 Access System User Manual. Note 3: Do not restore the secondary EOC/TMC at this time. 11.45.1.14 equest Provisioning of the T 303 V T Perform this procedure ONLY if the EOC/TMC links are in service and stable.
Page 894 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter the KEY attributes. Response: System populates remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter c Response: Change Field: Type and enter 21 Cursor at T 303 BK OUT attribute. Response: Type and enter C (for COMPLETED).
Page 895 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 150 For 5E10(1) and later: 151 Response: For 5E9(2) and earlier: Field 150: ow: For 5E10(1) and later: Field 151: ow: Type and enter row number 3 Response: Cursor at IFAC attribute of T TE M 3. Note: Record the FAC number that appears in this row.
Page 896 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter CA IAGE ETU N until the following response is received: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter u updating . . . FO M UPDATED. EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at the SM Response: attribute.
Page 897 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC type and enter menu command: 196 Procedure 11.1 Reference: To insert data, type and enter 7.11i. NAIL-UP AND HAI PIN SPECIFICATION page is displayed. Cursor at C OE field. Response: Using the list of existing nail-up or hairpin ports/circuits obtained in Step 11 of Prerequisite Conditions, perform an insert operation for each nail-up/hairpin circuit that is to be restored.
Page 898 235-105-210 October 1999 f YES, continue with next Step. f NO, go to Procedure 11.45.2.2 . At the MCC toggle the CMD/MSG key until the terminal is in the menu mode. At the MCC type and enter menu command: 196 Procedure 11.1 Reference: To update the RC/V view, type and enter 18.15u...
Page 899 Conversion personnel at the 5EES Switch should request their counterpart at the RT site to establish the new T0 cross-connects. Conversion personnel at the RT site should notify their counterpart at the 5ESS-2000 Switch when the T0 cross-connects have been established and line rehoming to the TR303 VRT can begin.
Page 900 235-105-210 October 1999 the conclusion of the rehoming activity. Step 1 obtains a list of directory numbers (DN) associated with lines (ports) served by the local RT being vacated. Step 3 obtains a list of DNs associated with lines (ports) served by the local RT being relocated to the TR303 VRT.
Page 901 NO, continue with Procedure 11.45.2.6 . 11.45.2.6 Determine Disposition of the Vacated T 008 V T s the vacated TR008 VRT to be deleted from the 5ESS-2000 Switch database? f NO, go to Procedure 11.45.4 f YES, continue with next Step.
Page 902 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: Are the FACs that were previously assigned to the now deleted TR008 VRT being reused in a TR303 VRT? f YES, continue with Procedure 11.45.2.7 f NO, go to Procedure 11.45.4 11.45.2.7 Change Suppression Method of Old IFACs This procedure changes the Suppression Method of the FACS that were associated with the deleted TR008 VRTs so that they may be utilized by a TR303 VRT.
Page 903 235-105-210 October 1999 Repeat Steps 6 through 9 until the Suppression Method has been changed for all the desired FACs, then continue with next Step. Enter CA IAGE ETU N until: Response: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter u updating .
Page 904 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter the FAC number being added to the TR303 VRT. For 5E(9) and earlier: Field 150: ow: Response: For 5E10(1) and later: Field 151: ow: Repeat Step 6 until all the FACs that will be associated with this TR303 VRT have been defined, then continue to next Step.
Page 905 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: XX = FAC number Response: The status box associated with the FAC is back lighted in green, and the status displayed is ACT. Go to Procedure 11.45.4 11.45.3 PE FO M T 008 TO T 303 CONVE SION BACKOUT CAUTION: These procedures should be performed ONLY if the TR303 conversion process is being aborted and the VRT will be restored to service.
Page 906 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter CA IAGE ETU N Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter u Response: updating . . . FO M UPDATED. EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Does the TR008 VRT have a protection line assigned? f YES, continue with next Step.
Page 907 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter r EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Response: Type and enter the KEY attributes. Response: System populates remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Verify all TR303 data was backed out and that the original TR008 data populates the view. Type and enter q Response: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed.
Page 908 235-105-210 October 1999 Note 1: Restore the lowest numbered RT FAC first. Where: a = SM number b = DCU number c = FAC number. ST IFAC a b c COMPLETED Response: The status box associated with the FAC is back-lighted in green, and the status displayed is ACT.
Page 909 235-105-210 October 1999 OP:NAILUP,IFAC=a-b-c Where: a = SM number b = DCU number c = FAC number. OP NAILUP IFAC xxxx Response: CON1 ILEN xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx ILEN xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx Compare the new list with the list obtained in Procedure 11.45.1.4 to ensure that all the nail-ups/hairpin circuits have been restored.
Page 910 235-105-210 October 1999 For 5E9(2) and later: ALW: PC,SM=a Where: a = SM that serves the RT being converted to TR303. 11.45.4.3 Allow outine Exercises ( EX) to esume This step is necessary only if routine exercises were inhibited at the start of the conversion procedure. At the MCC type and enter: ALW: EX,SM=a Where: a = SM that serves the VRT being converted to TR303.
Page 911 -2000 using its Craft nterface Terminal (C T). Verify that the SLC-2000 Access System is operating on software version 4.01.00 or later. The 5ESS-2000 switch should be on a minimum Software Release level of 5E9(2) with Software Update BWM95-0018. f this is the first RT being converted to the TR303 interface on this ntegrated Digital Carrier Unit ( DCU), verify that the Directly Connected Peripheral nterface Data Bus (DP DB) assignments have been made and that the DP DB cables are in place.
Page 912 (10) Verify that the suppression method currently used by the TR008 RT will be supported by the TR303 RT. Procedure 11.46.1.6 details the steps to accomplish this. (11) Obtain a hard-copy of the active nail-up/hairpin cross-connects existing in the 5ESS-2000 Switch data base, and nailup/hairpin assignments existing in the SLC-2000 data base. Procedure 11.46.1.4 provides the input messages required to identify the active nailup/hairpin connections.
Page 913 235-105-210 October 1999 To inhibit REX, at the MCC type and enter: INH: EX,SM=a Where: a = SM that serves the VRT being converted to TR303 Response: OK At the MCC type and enter: OP: EXINH Response: The inhibit status will be printed. Verify REX is inhibited for the SM.
Page 914 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: a = SM that serves the VRT being converted to TR303 Response: 11.46.1.3 Identify IFACs Associated with the T 008 T Conversion At the MCC or trunk and line work station (TLWS) type and enter: For 5E9(2) and later: 1870,y,x Where: y = DCU number x = SM number.
Page 915 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: f the VRT is equipped with a protection line, remove the FAC associated with the protection (PROT) line first. At the MCC or TLWS type and enter: For 5E9(2) and later: 1870,y,x Where: y = DCU number x = SM number.
Page 916 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter T 8B8 Change Field: Response: Enter CA IAGE ETU N Response: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print. Type and enter u updating . . . FO M UPDATED. EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Response: Cursor at the SM attribute.
Page 917 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter c Change Field: Response: Type and enter 5 Cursor at T INTE FACE attribute. Response: Type and enter T 303 Response: Change Field: Type and enter 15 Cursor at T 303 T EQSTAT attribute. Response: Type and enter O (letter 'O') Change Field:...
Page 918 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter next appropriate row number. Type and enter the FAC number from the work order form. Response: For 5E9(2) and earlier: Field 150: For 5E10(1) and later: Field 151: Return to Step 15. Enter CA IAGE ETU N.
Page 919 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 150 Change Field: Response: Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 166 For 5E10(1) and later: 167 Response: Cursor at NO ET ANS attribute. Type and enter 3 Change Field: Response: Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 167 For 5E10(1) and later: 168 Response:...
Page 920 235-105-210 October 1999 Cursor at TMC P I attribute. Response: Type and enter data from work order form. Note 2: The switch assigns values for the DP DB and T ME SLOT attributes. Change Field: Response: Type and enter: For 5E9(2) and earlier: 175 For 5E10(1) and later: 176 Response: Cursor at TMC NP I attribute.
Page 921 235-105-210 October 1999 Note: 5 The switch assigns values for the DP DB and T ME SLOT attributes. Change Field: Response: Are the same protocol handler assignments used for the previous entries in Steps 33,35,37 and 39? NOTE: See Step 8 (and Notes 1 and 2) at Prerequisite Conditions. f YES, continue with next step.
Page 922 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, go to Procedure 11.46.1.10 f YES, continue with Procedure 11.46.1.9 11.46.1.9 Make Corrections to T 303 Configuration Data CAUTION: Data must be backed out and reentered by using the following steps ONLY! At the RC/V terminal, View 18.15, type and enter ^ (Shift + 6) Response: Enter Database Operation I=Insert = eview U=Update D=Delete...
Page 923 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter q Response: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Type and enter < 18.0 SM and EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.46.1.11 Verify the Accuracy of T 303 Configuration Display At the MCC or TLWS type and enter: For 5E9(2) and later: 1880,y,z,x Where:...
Page 924 235-105-210 October 1999 Monitor the state of the EOC/TMC links. Note 1: f the switch removes the links from service due to excessive Level 2 errors, verify that the line encoding is consistent across all network elements (e.g., LDS, DACS, DDM-2000) involved in the transport of the TR303 DS1s from the LDS to the RT.
Page 925 235-105-210 October 1999 eference: Procedure 11.1 Type and enter 18.15u esponse: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Type and enter the KEY attributes. esponse: System populates remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter c esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 21...
Page 926 235-105-210 October 1999 active EOC/TMC will switch to standby. This is normal. Monitor the state of the EOC/TMC links. Note 2: f the switch removes the links from service due to excessive Level 2 errors, verify the line encoding at all network elements (e.g., LDS, DACS, DDM-2000) involved in the transport of the TR303 DS1s from the LDS to the RT.
Page 927 235-105-210 October 1999 This procedure guides the user through the steps generally associated with relocating lines (rehoming) to a newly converted VRT. t assumes that all the lines are being relocated from a RT that is being totally deloaded (vacated). f this is not the case then go to Procedure 11.46.4 , otherwise continue with Procedure 11.46.2 .
Page 928 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter < 18.0 SM & EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q CV-196 COMPLETED Response: 11.46.2.2 Identify Lines That Are To Be ehomed At the MCC type and enter: OP:LISTOTO,ILEN=a-b-c-1&&d; Where: a = SM number b = DCU number c = Local RT number of RT being vacated...
Page 929 235-105-210 October 1999 Conversion personnel at the RT site should notify their counterpart at the 5ESS-2000 Switch when the T0 cross-connects have been established and line rehoming to the TR303 VRT can begin. Perform line rehoming to the TR303 VRT 11.46.2.4 Verify The Accuracy of Line ehoming Activity...
Page 930 NO, continue with Procedure 11.46.2.6 . 11.46.2.6 Determine Disposition of the Vacated T 008 V T s the vacated TR008 VRT to be deleted from the 5ESS-2000 Switch database? f NO, go to Procedure 11.46.4 f YES, continue with next Step.
Page 931 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter < esponse: 18.0 SM and EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Type and enter q esponse: CV-196 COMPLETED Are the FACs that were previously assigned to the now deleted TR008 VRT being reused in a TR303 VRT? f YES, go to Procedure 11.46.2.7 f NO, go to Procedure 11.46.4 11.46.2.7 Change Suppression Method of Old IFACs...
Page 932 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter u esponse: updating . . . FO M UPDATED. IDCU FACILITY EQUIPMENT page displayed. Cursor at the SM attribute. f necessary, repeat Steps 3 through 12 for LS 1, then continue to next Step. Type and enter <...
Page 933 235-105-210 October 1999 Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Response: Type and enter u. updating . . . FO M UPDATED. EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Response: Cursor at the SM attribute. Type and enter < 18.0 SM and EMOTE TE MINALS VIEWS page displayed. Response: Type and enter q Response:...
Page 934 235-105-210 October 1999 MV:IFAC=a-b-c,UCL Where: a = SM number b = DCU number c = FAC number of the primary EOC/TMC links. MV IFAC a b c COMPLETED Response: 11.46.3.2 estore Original T 008 V T Configuration Data Select and prepare terminal for RC/V activities. eference: Procedure 11.1 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 18.15u...
Page 935 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Change Field: Type and enter 10 esponse: Cursor at P OT LINE attribute. Type and enter PROT L NE value saved in Procedure 11.46.1.7 , Step 2. esponse: Change Field: Enter CA IAGE ETU N. esponse: Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter u esponse:...
Page 936 235-105-210 October 1999 Perform activities at the RT site in accordance with procedures outlined in the following reference: eference: 363-208-001, SLC-2000 Access System User Manual NOTE: At this point the T0 cross-connects and the T1 feeder cross-connects can be reestablished using the SLC-2000 C T.
Page 937 235-105-210 October 1999 eference: Procedure 11.1 To insert data, type and enter 7.11i esponse: NAIL-UP AND HAI PIN SPECIFICATION page is displayed. Cursor at C OE field. Populate data fields as required for nail-up/hairpin circuit that is to be restored. Enter CA IAGE ETU N.
Page 938 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC type and enter the following command to enable brevity control: ALW:B EVC,SM=a Where: a = SM that serves the RT being converted to TR303 At the MCC type and enter the following command to deactivate the peripheral message verbose mode: CL :PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE Where: a = SM that serves the RT being converted to TR303.
Page 939 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.47: AUTO-SYNCH ONIZATION FEATU E ACTIVATION FO NETWO K CLOCK MODEL 2 OVE VIEW This section describes the procedure to activate Auto-synchronization on Network Clock Model 2 (NC2). This activation allows the NC2 to perform a continuous integrity check on an out-of-service reference. When the NC2 determines that the reference is good, the AM will automatically restore it to service.
Page 940 235-105-210 October 1999 At Master Control Center (MCC) observe Summary Status Area for a SYS NO M indication. f a SYS NO M indication is not obtained, type and enter OP:SYSSTAT; Evaluate system response to determine if system status is acceptable to continue. Specific attention is required for areas that can cause SM isolation or service impact during this activation procedure.
Page 941 235-105-210 October 1999 11.47.6 eplacing TN1276 NC2 Firmware Remove the TN1276 from the unit, observing all ESD precautions. Go to the static-free work area and ensure you are properly grounded. Remove the EPROMs using an C extraction tool. Refer to Figure 11.47.6-1 for EPROM location. Figure 11.47.6-1 EP OM Locations nstall the new EPROMs into the sockets.
Page 942 235-105-210 October 1999 Power up the CMCU by pressing the ON button on the SN516 at 528-006. EPT POWE ON ONTC 0 Response: 11.47.8 Update the CLI and Auto-Synchronization Fields Enter RC/V by entering CV:MENU:APP C; Bring up the 17.16 view for side 0 in the update mode. Change field 8.
Page 943 235-105-210 October 1999 f the TN1276 is a series 3 or less, replace the circuit pack with the new TN1276 (microcode MC5D215A2 or MC5D222A2) and go to Procedure 11.47.14 . f the TN1276 is series 4 or greater, the NC2 firmware must be replaced by using the EPROMs included in the upgrade baggie kit.
Page 944 235-105-210 October 1999 Change field 15 from no to yes. Update the view. Exit RC/V. 11.47.18 estore ONTCCOM 1 to Service At MCC, type and enter ST:ONTCCOM=1; Response: ST ONTCCOM 1 COMPLETED ATP 11.47.19 Initialize ONTC Process OVE VIEW NOTE: To start the Auto-Synchronization process, the SMKP process ONTCSSP must be initialized. This is a non-service-impacting, single-process purge.
Page 945 235-105-210 October 1999 Create a NC reference fault by opening the incoming reference signal at the repeater bay or DSX panel using a 310 plug. Observe the MCC page 1211 to ensure that the reference is removed from service. Eliminate condition triggering reference removal. Verify that within 10 minutes the reference is automatically restored.
Page 946 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.48: MAKE SCAN POINT ASSIGNMENTS FO THE MSU/MMSU OVE VIEW The TN220B scan pack provides the Metallic Service Unit (MSU) and the Modular Metallic Service Unit (MMSU) with the miscellaneous scanning capabilities. A scan pack contains 32 scan points which are used to monitor ®...
Page 947 235-105-210 October 1999 MSU/MMSU number, 0-1 Service group number, 0-1 Scan board number, 0-1 MV SCAN =a-b-c-d COMPLETED Response: Select and prepare terminal for RC/V activities. Procedure 11.1 Reference: Are scan point assignments new or update assignments? f NEW ASSIGNMENTS, continue with next step f UPDATE ASSIGNMENTS, go to Step 9 To assign new scan points, at the RC/V terminal, type and enter 8.13i Response:...
Page 948 235-105-210 October 1999 To make scan point update changes, at the RC/V terminal, type and enter 8.13u Response: The MSU/MMSU SCAN PO NT ASS GNMENT page is displayed. The cursor is positioned at the SCAN PO NT field. Type and enter data for KEY attribute field, SCAN PO NT. *1.
Page 949 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Data base backup will take several minutes to complete. To restore MSU scan board to service, at MCC type and enter: ST:SCAN=a-b-c-d; Where: SM Number. Same value as used in Step 2. MSU/MMSU number Same value as used in Step 2. Service group number Same value as used in Step 2.
Page 950 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.49: ASSIGN DNU-S DS1 FACILITY TO T 303 T 5E12(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure assigns Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facilities to an operational TR303 remote terminal (RT). equirements: ...
Page 951 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: number of the SM-2000 assigning the DS1 Facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH; esponse: The inhibit status will be printed. f Steps 5 and 6 were performed, verify the inhibit status printout. 11.49.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery Messages to Be Printed.
Page 952 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base back up will take several minutes to complete. 11.49.4 Verify DS1 Facility At the MCC, type and enter the following command: For E12(1) and earlier: 1511,b,ce,a For E13(1) and later:...
Page 953 235-105-210 October 1999 Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the indicated values for each KEY attribute. NOTE: Refer to Recent Change screen with the correct Software release. RECENT CHANGE 20.24 --- E12(1) AND EARLIER 1.
Page 954 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: For E12(1) and earlier: 1511,b,ce,a For E13(1) and later: 1511,b,cde,a Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data group number STE facility number STS-1 facility number. s the DS1SFAC state ACT? f NO, go to Step 4.
Page 955 235-105-210 October 1999 RECENT CHANGE 18.1 1. SM 2. UNIT TYPE 3. UNIT NUMBER _ 4. RT EX esponse: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter C esponse: Change Field: Type and enter TFACT M or field number. esponse: Change field: TFACT M row: Type and enter the row number (RT termination number) of a facility being added to the RT.
Page 956 235-105-210 October 1999 SM-2000 number S D number RTFAC number esponse: ST TFAC b c COMPLETED NOTE: No REPT DS1SFAC or CGA output messages should be seen for this facility. Repeat Step 1 for each RTFAC being restored for this TR303 RT assignment. 11.49.10 Verify DS1 Facility Assignment At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1660,b,a...
Page 957 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 512 (1800,a CMD) CL :PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE; Where: SM-2000 number. esponse: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP; esponse: 11.49.13 eturn outine Exercises to Normal. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 702 (1800,a CMD) ALW: EX,SM=a;...
Page 958 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.50: UNASSIGN DNU-S DS1 FACILITY F OM T 303 T 5E12(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure unassigns digital networking unit - SONET (DNU-S) digital signal 1 (DS1) facilities from a TR303 remote terminal (RT). Separate procedures exist for assigning DNU-S DS1 facilities to a TR303 RT and degrowing DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 facilities.
Page 959 235-105-210 October 1999 INH: EX,SM=a; Where: number of the SM-2000. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH; esponse: The inhibit status will be printed. f Steps 5 and 6 were performed, verify the inhibit status printout. 11.50.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery Messages to Be Printed At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,TOBKUP;...
Page 960 235-105-210 October 1999 11.50.3 Backup Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base back up will take several minutes to complete.
Page 961 235-105-210 October 1999 4. RT EX esponse: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, Screen#, or Print: Type and enter C esponse: Change Field: Type and enter TFACT M or field number. esponse: Change field: TFACT M row: Type and enter the row number (RT termination number) of a facility being degrown from the TR303 RT.
Page 962 235-105-210 October 1999 RECENT CHANGE 20.24 --- E13(1) AND LATER 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STE . STS 6. VT GROUP 7. VT MEMBER esponse: System completes remainder of view. Enter Update, Change, Validate, or Print: Type and enter C esponse: Change Field:...
Page 963 235-105-210 October 1999 11.50.8 emove DS1 Cross Connects This is the Telephone Company responsibility. Request cross connects be removed for degrown DS1s. 11.50.9 Verify Unassignment of DS1 Facilities From T 303 T At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1660,b,a Where: SM-2000 number...
Page 964 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD; esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base back up will take several minutes to complete. 11.50.12 Inhibit Additional Fault ecovery Message Printing NOTE: Wait one-half hour before continuing this procedure and monitor the ROP for "ANALYS S ONLY", "REPT TRBL", and "PFR"...
Page 965 235-105-210 October 1999 ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: SM-2000 inhibited. esponse: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 8...
Page 966 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.51: G OW DNU-S T 303 T 5E12(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW CAUTION: This procedure is not to be performed unless the Remote Terminal (RT) is physically turned up. This procedure grows a TR303 remote terminal (RT) using Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facilities.
Page 967 235-105-210 October 1999 inhibited, it must be allowed at the conclusion of this growth procedure. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 602 (1800 CMD) INH: EX,SM=a; Where: number of the SM-2000 growing the DS1 facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH;...
Page 968 235-105-210 October 1999 SM-2000 number. esponse: 11.51.3 Backup Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD;...
Page 969 EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Obtain RT vendor documentation for correct facility assignment and EOC/TMC backup designation. Example: ® The Lucent Technologies SLC Series 5 FP303G EOC/TMC backup designation must be on RT TERM 3. ® For Lucent Technologies SLC Series 2000 FP303G EOC/TMC, the backup designation must be on RT TERM 2.
Page 970 235-105-210 October 1999 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.24U esponse: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM2000) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form 20.24 as a guide, type and enter values for each KEY attribute. NOTE: Refer to Recent Change screen with the correct Software Release.
Page 971 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS page displayed. 11.51.8 Update T 303 T from Grow to Operational Type and enter 18.15U esponse: EMOTE TE MINAL page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form 18.15 as a guide, type and enter the values for each KEY attribute. RECENT CHANGE 18.1 1.
Page 972 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: Change Field: Type and enter EOCP I or field number. esponse: Cursor at EOC P I ISCN attribute. Type and enter value from the selected work order form. esponse: Cursor at EOC P I DPIDB attribute. Enter CA IAGE ETU N twice.
Page 973 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 3cc (1660,b,a CMD) ST: TFAC=b-c; Where: SM-2000 number S D number RTFAC number esponse: ST TFAC b a COMPLETED NOTE: No REPT DS1SFAC or CGA output messages should be seen for this facility. Repeat Step 1 for each RTFAC being restored for this TR303 RT growth.
Page 974 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 401 (1660,b,a CMD) SW:DNUSTMC=a-c-d; Where: SM-2000 number S D number DNUS number RT number. Verify that the TMC switches successfully. 11.51.13 Backup Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable.
Page 975 235-105-210 October 1999 Where: SM-2000 number. esponse: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP; esponse: 11.51.15 eturn outine Exercises to Normal At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 702 (1800,a CMD) ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: SM-2000 inhibited.
Page 976 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.52: DEG OW DNU-S T 303 T 5E12(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure degrows a TR303 remote terminal (RT) that uses Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) Digital Signal 1 (DS1) facilities. Separate procedures exist for degrowing DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 facilities: ...
Page 977 235-105-210 October 1999 acc_rid = 1820 acc_head = 0 acc_rcnt = 0 acc_wflg = 0 acc_grbg = 0 acc_state = ACCCU acc_nidix = 0 acc_bidx = 0 rel_hsze = 256 Hit <C > to see access method specific dictionary Enter CA IAGE ETU N.
Page 978 235-105-210 October 1999 Type and enter 1024 esponse: rel_dsze = 256 Data page size (rel_dsze) (<C > keeps default)? Type and enter 1024 esponse: rel_tmax = 200 Maximum number of tuples (rel_tmax) (<C > keeps default)? Type and enter 5000 esponse: After EO G, the new access dictionary will be the following.
Page 979 235-105-210 October 1999 ACCDICT acc_rid = 1820 acc_head = 0 acc_rcnt = 0 acc_wflg = 0 acc_grbg = 0 acc_state = ACCCU acc_nidix = 0 acc_bidx = 0 rel_hsze = 1024 Hit <C > to see access method specific dictionary Enter CA IAGE ETU N.
Page 980 235-105-210 October 1999 11.52.2 emove All Terminal Assignments from the emote Terminal Being Degrown Remove all terminal assignments (lines and/or trunks) from the remote terminal. 11.52.3 Verify and Set Initial Conditions At the Master Control Center (MCC), observe Summary Status Area for a SYS NORM indication.
Page 981 235-105-210 October 1999 CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,TOBKUP; esponse: OK with exceptions At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,P INT=ON,LOG=ON; esponse: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 412 (1800,a CMD) SET:PE PH,SM=a,VE BOSE; Where: SM-2000 number. esponse: At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 609 (1800,a CMD) INH:B EVC,SM=a;...
Page 982 235-105-210 October 1999 MV: TFAC=b-c ,UCL; Where: SM-2000 number S D number RTFAC number esponse: MV TFAC b c COMPLETED Repeat Step 1 for each remaining active TFAC. 11.52.7 Delete T 303 T from Data Base Select and prepare terminal for recent change and verify (RC/V) activities. eference: Procedure 11.1 At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 18.15D...
Page 983 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Refer to Recent Change screen with the correct Software release. RECENT CHANGE 20.24 E12(1) AND EARLIER 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP _ 4. STS . VT RECENT CHANGE 20.24 E13(1) AND LATER 1. SM 2.
Page 984 235-105-210 October 1999 11.52.9 eorganize Hashed elations At the MCC, type and enter the following command: EXC: EO G; esponse: EPT EO G COMPLETED ELATION = a Wait 5 minutes after each completed message for additional responses before continuing. Where: 11.52.10 emove DS1 Cross Connects This is the Telephone Company responsibility.
Page 985 235-105-210 October 1999 eference: f degrowth of the VT1.5/DS1 facilities is required, refer to:  5E12(1) and earlier, Procedure 11.30 .  5E13(1) and later, Procedure 11.54 . 11.52.13 Backup Office Dependent Data NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable.
Page 986 235-105-210 October 1999 At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,F OMBKUP; esponse: 11.52.15 eturn outine Exercises to Normal At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 702 (1800,a CMD) ALW: EX,SM=a; Where: SM-2000 inhibited. esponse: STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright ©...
Page 987 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.53: G OW DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 FACILITY 5E13(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure grows Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) Virtual Tributary 1.5/Digital Signal 1 (VT1.5/DS1) facilities. t accommodates the changes to numbering VT1.5 facilities from 1-28 to the new VT Groups 1-4 and VT Members 1-7.
Page 988 235-105-210 October 1999 602 (1800 CMD) INH: EX,SM =a; Where: number of the SM-2000 growing the VT1.5/DS1 Facilities. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: OP: EXINH; esponse: The inhibit status will be printed. f Steps 5 and 6 were performed, verify the inhibit status printout. 11.53.2 Allow Peripheral Fault ecovery Messages to Be Printed At the MCC, type and enter the following command: CHG:LPS,MSGCLS=ALL,TOBKUP;...
Page 989 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: Prior to the response, there will be completed responses for each SM/SM-2000, the AM, and the CMP if applicable. At the MCC, type and enter the following command: BKUP:ODD. esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base back up will take several minutes to complete. 11.53.4 Verify Parent STE Facility At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 1510,b,a...
Page 990 Group 1, the PCT Link number will be 1 for both CDs Comment: f PCT link is not operational, refer to the DNU-S PCT LINK GROWTH PROCEDURE in 235-105-231, 5ESS Switch and 5ESS-2000 Switch Hardware Change Procedures - Growth and correct using terminal in the update mode. Type and enter <...
Page 991 235-105-210 October 1999 RECENT CHANGE 20.24 1. SM 2. DNUS 3. DATA GROUP 4. STE . STS 6. VT GROUP 7. VT MEMBER Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the values for each of the remaining attributes.
Page 992 235-105-210 October 1999 NOTE: The update decision (separately or one operation) is made by the telephone company. f SEPA ATELY, go to Section 11.53.17 . f ONE OPE ATION, continue with next Section. 11.53.14 Update VT1.5/DS1 to Operational At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.24U esponse: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM2000) page displayed.
Page 993 235-105-210 October 1999 DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM2000) page displayed. Repeat Steps 2 through 9 for each VT1.5/DS1 Facility being grown. Type and enter < esponse: 20.0 SM PACK & SUBPACK VIEWS1 page displayed. Type and enter q esponse: CV-196 COMPLETED or CV MENU APP C COMPLETED...
Page 994 235-105-210 October 1999 To perform Final Growth Steps, go to Section 11.53.23 . 11.53.17 Update VT1.5 to Operational At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.24U esponse: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM2000) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute.
Page 995 235-105-210 October 1999 11.53.18 estore VT1.5 Facility to Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 31fg (1511,b,cde,a CMD) ST:VT1FAC=a-b-c-d-e-f-g; Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data group number STE facility number STS-1 facility number VT1.5 facility group number VT1.5 facility member number.
Page 996 235-105-210 October 1999 f NO, go to Section 11.53.25 . 11.53.22 Update DS1 Facility to Operational At the RC/V terminal, type and enter 20.24U esponse: DIGITAL NETWO KING UNIT SONET VI TUAL T IBUTA Y (SM2000) page displayed. Cursor at SM attribute. Using the selected work order form as a guide, type and enter the values for each KEY attribute.
Page 997 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: CV-196 COMPLETED or CV MENU APP C COMPLETED 11.53.23 estore DS1 Facility to Service At the MCC, type and enter the following command: 32fg (1511,b,cde,a CMD) ST:DS1SFAC=a-b-c-d-e-f-g; Where: SM-2000 number DNU-S number Data group number STE facility number STS-1 facility number VT1.5 facility group number VT1.5 facility member number.
Page 998 235-105-210 October 1999 esponse: BKUP ODD COMPLETED NOTE: Data base back up will take several minutes to complete. 11.53.26 Inhibit Additional Fault ecovery Message Printing NOTE: Wait one-half hour before continuing this procedure and monitor the receive-only printere (ROP) for ANALYSIS ONLY, EPT T BL, and PF messages that may implicate this new hardware or associated hardware.
Page 999 235-105-210 October 1999 STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS P OCEDU E. Copyright © 1999 Page 13...
Page 1000 235-105-210 October 1999 Procedure 11.54: DEG OW DNU-S VT1.5/DS1 FACILITY 5E13(1) AND LATE OVE VIEW This procedure degrows Digital Networking Unit - SONET (DNU-S) Virtual Tributary 1.5/ Digital Signal 1 (VT1.5/DS1) facilities for 5E13(1) and later software releases. t accommodates the changes to numbering VT1.5 facilities from 1-28 to the newer VT Groups 1-4 and VT Members 1-7.

Save PDF